Home

Magnifi User`s Guide

1. Local configuration Enable instrument filter Filter Auto Show leon MAC Address E Te Status Connect Broadcasting instruments MAC Address IP Address E Ho Location Station number 1 ka Bootp service used Zetec Bootp Service Network interface Local Area Connection IP address 192 168 33 134 Options Cancel Appendix C 313 Establishing Communication with Magnifi Once proper communication is established between your workstation and the test unit establishing communication with Magnifi with the TC7700 and MS5800 is as simple as connecting with an Ectane Note Jf you intend to use the Ectane along a TC7700 or an MS5800 with the same computer you must configure a static P address to communicate with the Ectane See Configuring Ectane for Static IP Addresses on page 295 for details To establish communication with the a TC7700 or MS5800 1 Start the instrument 2 Start Magnifi 3 Load a setup made for the TC7700 or the MS5800 4 Click Connect to an instrument Figure G 2 Connecting to an Instrument A 02 Connect to an instrument ri ia a Note Jfthere are no instruments listed in the Instrument Connection dialog box verify that you have an active link with instruments in the Bootp service Also make sure that your current setup is compatible with the TC7700 or the MS5
2. To select non contiguous channels in the list press the CTRL key while clicking on all the channels that you want to select 3 Click the Disable the selected channel s button to send the selected channels in the Disabled column 4 Click OK when you are done Enabling Disabling Channels 139 140 P To disable all channels 1 2 3 From the Settings menu select Acquisition Setup gt Enable Disable Channels or click the Enable disable channels button in the Acquisition Setup toolbar The Enable Disable Channels window appears Click the Disable all filtered channel s button to send all channels in the Disabled column Click OK when you are done To enable selected channels 1 3 4 From the Settings menu select Acquisition Setup gt Enable Disable Channels or click the Enable disable channels button in the Acquisition Setup toolbar The Enable Disable Channels window appears In the Disabled list see Figure 3 83 select the channels to enable To select one channel click the channel To select contiguous channels in the list click one channel press the SHIFT key and click the last channel that you want to select All channels between the first and last selected become selected as well To select non contiguous channels in the list press the CTRL key while clicking on all the channels that you want to select Click the Enable selected channel s button to send the selec
3. c cccscssssccesssseeeeesseeeeeesseteeeesssateeeeses 263 Selecting and Measuring Data in IRIS Projections ccccsscccssssesesseesesseeeessseeeessseeeessaeees 267 USING Screen GaptUr S ssori aaa a aaa aaa aaan 268 Makmg ocreen Gape S nerone O E a A aed 268 Saving SCLC N GALES rorodaan re aN E AAEN NA NE 269 Punung SCFECM GADUUILGS roir a 269 Closing the Screen Capture Tool essssesssseseneneenenennnnunenuenenunnonunsnnnnnnenunnenunnnnunnnnnnnnennnnennnnennn 269 Creating Bubble NOUS cesciccsascdcciccssaccssdcncstidanatetsanseadstassseutewsaniesacedununcudeccvenssccecdeeenssunnet 270 Managing ROD ONUS ccecse sare cccetcteeuitekscescedccdtaeaddesebacdinuduuwadcasaeeaducntbenusdduassasecueeencussueeuensanss 271 Configuring TOPOS sirrinin a a a a A a 21 Adding Report Entries cccscssessesscssersssscrersessensersensanseeesesseeseusessensenseusnsevensensersascansueesenses 215 PETE TITG 1G OEE IMT OS aoea a Nt tac ge a ed ete 2 8 EIN G HE DOG EMECY NICS tic ices ts chdhd dev scevededudevatednteyateratecndavedadntdetadstepadaedsonterede atedetars 280 Viewing Data from a Report Entry ccccccsscccsssseescssreessseeeeeesseeeesceeesesaeeessetasessetesessateeeens 283 Table of Contents SONNO REDON EMIS ti sickeiceciciobcacadeed chai cesiceveoeGdahencbisaierapeaminsadevaraschesevesctusavaraierdiesaitebioeduet 283 Printing PrevieWiNg Reports ccccccccsssessssssesessssesesesesssensessueusescueuseseueusesauensusavensus
4. 2 Select Properties The Properties window for this side view appears Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Figure 1 65 Side view Properties window Properties Display Preview Grd W Crop line Position cursors Data type Colors Per channel O C scan 5 E zcan r ltem Background Color Use global color Caneel 3 Inthe Display section you can choose to display or hide Grid a grid with accompanying voltage scale Crop line displays a horizontal cursor that serves as a threshold when measuring defects Position cursors a vertical and a horizontal line that follow the cursor as you move it over the chart 4 Inthe Data type section you can select the type of data displayed either from channels 1 e for bobbin probes or from C scan axes 1 e from array probes 5 In the Colors section you can choose the colors that you want to use for the strip chart These colors are the same as the ones defined in Configuring Views Colors on page 40 6 Click OK when you are done The selected options now appear in the side view Managing Views 56 Configuring A scan Views A scans are a simple representation of an ultrasound scan performed during an IRIS inspection They show the data detected as well as the measurement values for each data point In Magnifi you can configure certain parameters that apply to each data point individually To do so 1 Right click over a displayed A scan vi
5. 5 Enter notes on the new material if necessary 6 Click OK The new material is created Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 189 Removing Existing Materials Note You cannot remove materials from the default list To remove an existing material 1 On the Settings menu click Materials The Materials dialog box appears 2 In the list of existing materials select the one that you want to remove 3 Click Remove The selected material is removed from the list Note You can also quickly remove all added materials by clicking Remove All This will not remove the default materials list Adding Notes to Materials Note You cannot add notes to default materials To do so 1 2 3 4 On the Settings menu click Materials The Materials dialog box appears In the list of existing materials select the one to which you want to add notes Enter your notes in the Notes for selected material text box Click OK Your notes are saved Managing Materials 190 Managing Probes Magnifi comes with an official Eddyfi probe database containing all Eddyfi probes Settings gt Probe Database This database helps speed up configuration operations especially in the Setup Wizard see Preparing Acquisition Setups with the Wizard on page 65 These probes cannot be removed from the database However there are still certain operations that can be performed on new user probes These operations
6. 1 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings menu The Scan Parameters window appears Figure 3 39 The Scan Parameters window for tube bore scans with rotating probes Scan Parameters Scan type Linear single asis scan bobbin Tube bore Rotating probe Array probe Rotating array probe 2D surface scan Single channel raster scan Single pass array probe Array probe raster scan Polar array scan Polar raster scan Tube bore ingpection with a rotating probe Get position from Acquisition clack Encoder tigger Circumferential aris Resolution check Tube ID 0 0000 rn Circumferential axis 0 000 36 0000 0 0000 Minimum density Speed rotation Acquisition density Acquisition resolution 0 0000 Maximum probe speed 0 0000 C scan Circumferential axis From 0 Size 360 Display resolution 0 000 Min display resolution 16 2000 Configuring Scan Parameters Acquisition rate Sampling clock Requested Actual Internal clack S00 0000 agg C scan orientation empl deg Ips empl deg deg smpl Ips deg deg degsmpl deg smpl ako a ol Full Absolute Encoders Axial axis Axial axis 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 ampl mm mm s amplmm mmsmpl mm Axial axis 0 0000 mm 200 0000 mm 0 0000 mmsmpl J Automatic avial display resolution Cancel 110 Figure 3 40 The Scan Parameters window for typical IRIS scans Scan Parameters S
7. Indicates the label given to a channel For more information on labeling channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the type of data displayed channels in the case of voltage planes Indicates the scale of the displayed data For more information on modifying the scale see Measuring Indications on page 261 Indicates the frequency of the displayed data For more information on frequencies see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the coil to which belongs the displayed data For more information on coil numbers see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Allows you to link views For more information see Linking Views on page 61 Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Figure 1 19 The voltage plane measurement bar 1 2 3 4 5 PP Man ow Co 3 38 Vpp 58 pp ext 347 49 50D 7 6 Table 1 5 Description of voltage plane measurement bar items 1 Measurement Allows you to choose a different measurement method for the signal displayed in method the voltage plane selection PP peak to peak PP FT peak to peak first transition MR maximum rate MaN manual For more information on measurement methods see Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Methods on page 74 2 Normalize Normalizes the displayed signal see Editing the Voltage Plane Processing Unit on page 156 see also Performing RFT Speci
8. ee To organise the order in which columns appear in the report place the cursor over the double arrow next to the column title The cursor changes to this Cursor used when moving columns in a report Once the cursor has the shape shown in Figure 5 20 click and drag the column title to the place where you want it in the list In the report columns from left to right appear from top to bottom in the Visible columns list Once you are done selecting and organizing the columns that will appear in your report click OK The Options window closes and you return to the Report window where columns have been rearranged according to the order defined in the Visible columns list If you started configuring from a display profile you can save this report profile with your setup by selecting Display profiles gt Saved with setup from the contextual menu that appears when you right click anywhere on the Report window Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 275 Adding Report Entries While performing a visual analysis of the acquired data you might need to add entries to a report Depending on the report and on where you are in the application you can add report entries in one of four ways from the Lissajous or Voltage plane window from the Report window from the report status from the Indication Codes toolbar From the Lissajous or Voltage Plane Window To add entries in a report from the Lissajous or voltage
9. r Instrument Configuration Wizard er AE nnn Fac edere andl Gude ned l Topologies Enter the parameters related to the encoders and digital inputs Conventional Probe T1 Type Resolution Filter Quadrature sw 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz Quadrature i 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz Quadrature x 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz lw Active low If you select an encoder and select an External preset digital input 2 is dedicated to the preset function for example Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups Configuring General Acquisition Parameters The second step offered by the configuration wizard is the configuration of general acquisition parameters Figure 3 16 Configuring general acquisition parameters rc Instrument Configuration Wizard l Topologies i General parameters Conventional Probe T1 Acquisition Naming Source Intemal Clock z Freguency Index Rate 800 Hz Resulting Channel Name R_COIL1 F1 Topologies Conventional Probe cmnnannnnnsyad Disable drivers at the acquisition stop Channel bandwidth 1 576 Hz Mux time action 20 us Eddy current frequency tolerance 3 0 Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish To configure general acquisition parameters 1 In the Acquisition subsection select the source of the acquisition rate from the Source drop down lis
10. Anywhere F1 Opens the User s manual Anywhere Space bar Centers data in the different opened views When an F2 Starts Stops an acquisition instrument is connected When an F4 Starts acquisition of the next file instrument is connected When an F6 Balances probe s instrument is connected When acquiring F5 When some F7 Goes to the previous trigram trigrams displayed in code window When some F8 trigrams displayed in code window Inspection mode F10 Starts Stops saving data Acquisition mode Delete General Keyboard Shortcuts 338 Miscellaneous Table D 7 Mouse and keyboard functions Code window Code window Analysis mode Analysis mode Acquisition mode Acquisition mode Acquisition mode Acquisition mode Acquisition mode Acquisition mode Acquisition mode indication area File list File list File list File list File list File list Left click Right click Middle click Right click Left click Next button Right click Next button Right click Row x Left click Row x Right click Col x Left click Col x Left click Insert Right click Insert Delete Toggle between channel code window and C scan code window Opens a contextual menu Load next data file Add a new tube with Row less x Add a new tube with Col less X Add a new tube Delete selected tube Appendix D TM T 1 418 780 1565 e y F 1 418 780 2354 info eddyfi c
11. C scan name Test C scan cancel The name of the new C scan appears selected in the left column C sean with a red X beside it C scan error to indicate that it has not been configured yet 3 In the Process section right click Add The Add Data Processing window appears where you can select data processing operations Figure 3 106 The Add Data Processing window m Add Data Processing Analysis Bracelet alignment Build from C scan Build from channel Copy to Derivate Export to file FIR Filter Filter Flaw location program Import from file Interpolation Mask Median filter Mixing Scale Subtraction Tube filter Turbo Mix Caneel When starting a new C scan process you must choose one of the following four processes Build from channel Built from C scan Mixing Import from File These processes are explained in the following section see page 164 Most of the time you will start a C scan with the Built from channel process Processes must be configured as you select them from the Add Data Processing window 4 Once you have added all the processes that you want and properly configured them click OK The C scan Configuration window disappears and your C scan is configured Managing C scans 164 Editing G scan Processes There are many processes available for C scan processing Only the most important processes are covered in the following pages Once you un
12. Casi Pecenned thang 120mm 1 200mm COR COR tiem IMAT 26S mm WEDOS IO A mm OD dmnn da COR Con ID FWp 100G mm Fie 676 ns BW 1272mm BWe 723 ns WT 269mm WL 101 5 POr 2155mm AR ee Sep o Genea Gates l H yu ie i Gean I we Hi rT j j Y 5 iiim IJ l See 30 d 7 ety it if 1 T Beste Samy if 1 i Tengion 20 000 oe ya if i I inp Fier 4524 MH i 1 if An hheaion Yes i a f t eraztun Fili WH Fi o I ae ee a ee pat accel VYpor Mim 1 95 Scale S0smpl RPR TT gs Brc MM fo 190 68 1007 Deh Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 237 Validating Defect Detection To do so 1 Move the probe in the tube to validate that all defects are properly detected 2 If needed readjust the back wall gate to improve the detection of defects Figure 4 20 Validating defect detection Lu Megnifi 328279 ousers ngrenierqhecwocuments magni sebaris demamagzetup h aj File View leting Gperstion Layouts Special Help ta tt E 4 BG na ee By by Le Cy feed LOD ad ad eed ie Ce ieu A Setup Al Automatic cording Scan parameten Sing surety Proceed channels I Mifbam EWT 150mm W833 96 1D 20 0 mm De 23 0 da dC 180 0 deg TE FWe 00mm FWE GSI ns BWe 11 63imm Bae Fins WT 153mm WESL7 POT2155 me AR a e iga F ap n j Generel Goes Io i Vo if
13. Configuring A scan View Parameters on page 57 Managing Layouts 24 C scans Magnifi offers two types of C scans 3D Standard Figure 1 24 3D C scan top and standard C scan bottom cF1 Jm 3500 00 Y x 0 030 Q 1334294 60 GOT sonz Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 25 Elements of a G scan All C scan views 8D and standard are presented the same way with the same elements as displayed below Figure 1 25 The 3D and standard C scan management bar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a om h wy ca ee 100 00 vaso OL sH p se il 200kH2 Pt 10 9 8 Table 1 8 Description of 3D and standard C scan management bar items 1 Channel C scan list 2 Channel C scan name 3 Channel Labels 4 3D C scan values 3D C scan only 5 3D C scan tools button 3D C scan only 6 Color palette 7 Axis 8 Frequency 9 Coil 10 Link Managing Layouts Gives you access to the list of available channels or C scans For more information see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the name of the channel or C scan For more information on naming channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Allows you to select the type of channel that you are manipulating raw filtered or unlabeled Allows you to view the values applied to the rotation of a 3D C scan and to modify a few of them values with up down arrows on the
14. FF OH F a o O g Figure 1 52 Figure 1 53 3D C Scan A Scan C Scan Code Default Lissajous Polar 3D View Polar View Projection Side View Strip Chart Voltage Plane assign a view to a pane In the Layout toolbar click the Replace view button A list of available views appears List of available views bba Cb aM HAA e 3D C scan ar A scan jo C scan Code Default Lissajous Polar 3D View Polar View Projection Side View Strip Chart 0 aan Voltage Plane Select the view that you want to assign The menu closes and the cursor changes to this The Assign View cursor Ri Click in the pane where you want to assign the selected view The view appears in the pane Managing Views 44 Configuring General Strip Chart Parameters Strip charts display inspection results generally over a time period and from bottom to top of the screen In Magnifi you can configure parameters that apply to all displayed strip charts measurement unit and display direction of strip charts You can also configure parameters that apply to each strip chart individually see page 46 To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Click the Display tab 440 III Figure 1 54 The Display tab Z Preferences X Views color scheme Strip Chat Current scheme White Time Distance B
15. Management bar Data selection eA brackets Data selection 4 lt cursor errr rr rr rrirrerrirrrrreerererrrritrrererrrtirrtietiee eC Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Elements of a Strip Chart All strip charts are presented the same way with the same elements as displayed below Figure 1 13 The strip chart management bar Y 1 1 9 Table 1 1 Description of strip chart management bar items Managing Layouts Channel C scan list Channel C scan name Channel C scan label Data type Axis Scale Frequency Coil Link Gives you access to the list of available channels or C scans For more information see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the name of the channel or C scan For more information on naming channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the label given to a channel For more information on labeling channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the type of data displayed C scan X or Y component or channels Indicates whether the vertical or horizontal component of the data is displayed Indicates the scale of the displayed data For more information on modifying the scale see Measuring Indications on page 261 Indicates the frequency of the displayed data For more information on frequencies see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Informatio
16. aTi E 1 w00 LE We J Lie T T ee Seer came ameeceonsiees ON i EEEE l Citin d Drg Certi I a e z5 pn oF T PEA e PS ERRERA PE EEEE BTT lt c _ amp Po E i aome E i G seron l FT F E N E ET E FHE l i i TTi i BH r i f N A T a ii Tabata Fa isa F 5 a coe om foma ani i e a a Pan 0 wis 1 po 1 43 w00 280 Yon ii 74 XOD i l E e he nal Se Fa y e 3 f f 4 F 10 Click Calibrate System calibration is performed based on the reference 6 7 Z 8 9 Figure 4 22 11 Note measurements taken Click Close After calibration it is always possible to rotate the signal further by click dragging the rotation button in the Lissajous see page 14 Calibrating Systems 240 Calibrating C scans C scan calibration is similar to channel calibration previous section except that the data is selected from the C scans To do so 1 Select Operation gt System Calibration or click System calibration from ia the General toolbar The Calibration window appears Figure 4 23 The Calibration window m gt Calibration Channel Channel and Sizing Curves Sizing Curves C scan C scan and Sizing Curves IRIS Landmark NOTCH 2 Select C Scan or C Scan and Sizing Curves this will adjust the rotation and gain of the C scans that have been submitted to a Scale
17. gt Single pass array probe aT Em E i Array probe raster scan i Polar array scan gt Polar raster scan Single channel raster scan surface inspection Get position from Absolute Encoders Encoder tiager manis anis Encoder Encoder r C scan Hanis anis From 0 0000 mm 0 0000 mm Size 2000 0000 mm 1000 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 5000 mmsmpl 0 5000 mmsmpl Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 123 2 Inthe Scan type section select Single channel raster scan under 2D surface scan When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Parameters window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder For more information on defining encoders see page 82 Figure 3 59 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Note Acquisition rate Sampling clock Internal clack T Requested 500 0000 Hz Actual agi Hz a From the Sampling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate is controlled by an internal clock an external clock or a preset encoder b Ifyou chose Internal clock enter the acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automat
18. provided by the wizard To access the setup wizard in the Settings menu select Acquisition Setup gt Configuration Wizard The Instrument Configuration Wizard ry window opens You can also click the Configuration wizard button in the Acquisition Setup toolbar Note Jfthe Configuration Wizard item is not available first select File gt New gt Ectane Setup Figure 3 10 The Instrument Configuration Wizard window f Instrument Configuration Wizard ancoan N General El Topologies Conventional Probe T1 Encoders Enter the parameters related to the encoders Type Unit Resolution Filter Preset External Action On Start Value Name 1 Encoder 1 2 Encoder 2 i 3 Encoder 3 Quadrature Quadrature Quadrature mm imm imm 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz v PresetActiveLow v i PresetActiveLow v i PresetActiveLow Cancel None 0 000 mm v None 0000mm v None 10 000 mm Next gt gt Finish Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups 82 Configuring Encoders and Digital Inputs The first step offered by the configuration wizard is configuration of the encoders and digital inputs if any Figure 3 11 Encoders and Digital Inputs F instrament Configuration Wizard Encoders and Digtal inputs Emer the parameters related to the enc
19. the displayed results but also the greater the risk of losing sight of potentially meaningful data points 4 Click OK The Interpolation window disappears and the Interpolation process is configured Configuring the Filter Process The Filter process allows you to remove certain signal frequencies high or low in a displayed data To configure the Filter process 1 Once you have selected the process from the Add Data Processing window see Figure 3 106 the Filter Setup window appears Figure 3 113 Filter Setup window Filter Setup Filter Setup Y anis Circ Axial Low pass High pass Low pass High pass Filter distance 100 0 Filter distance 100 0 mm Filter frequency 1 0 Hz Filter frequency Filter order 2 Cancel Filter order 2 2 Select whether you want to apply your filter to X or Y surface geometry scans or to Axial tube geometry scans 3 Select whether you want it to be high pass or low pass Using a low pass filter allows you to keep slow variation signals long defects lift off while using the high pass filter allows you to keep fast variation signals sharp defects such as cracks notches and pits 4 Select whether you want to filter based on distance or frequency If you select Filter distance enter the distance in the mm field If you select Filter frequency enter the cut off frequency that you want to filter out in the Hz field 5 Inthe Filter order field enter
20. uj Magnifi 3 3R2T1 File View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help x Setup Acquis Analysis Qa Setup M Automatic recording Scan parameters Sizing curves C scan Processed channels 7079 2 7 079s 44is TS1 2439 3 mm eddufi i DOBBOHOABE Y pos 2157 679mm X pos 348 000 Y smpl 7079 X smpl 29 T 7 079s AT 411s Y Lm TS1 2439 3 mm 22 03 Table of Gontents 1 introducing Magnifi sscccssscccssscccnsecccnsecccsseeecsseeensseecsssees d Starting MANUEL as ccsccasinks cesiceeceenctncncswaasteds wes aaa eaaa aaan aa Aiaia ANa aapi ANA 2 Understanding the User Interface sssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 TUe and MENU ec anes ee on ee eee ee 3 TOODI aaee terior oie ner ber op Choir icine Re none rr Snr rr Creer Cro OnE ere rrr Crete ce cre One ere erore oer Ee Ore 4 Sals o 2 game ect ar aaa at ater tr trae er a eR a eae eT 4 COMOLAR INFO BANS ainoaan i rrei N N AN NAN TETN 5 Hata DISD ATOA anise a E NNA 6 Configuring the Info and Status Bars ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 7 Switching between Operation Modes ssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 8 Managing Toolbars ssoi aaa aaa aaa a aaa E aara ia 9 Displaving Hiding TOODA S isiiisisiririsansini i a a 9 CHANONGO ZO a S 10 ReanrandiNg TO
21. 135 136 For 2D Surface Polar Raster Scans To set up scan parameters for 2D surface polar raster scans 1 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings menu The Scan Parameters window appears Figure 3 78 The Scan Parameters window for 2D surface polar raster scans Scan type 5 Linear single asis scan bobbin Tubebore O Rotating probe O Aray probe O Rotating aray probe 2D surtace scan Single channel raster scan Single pass array probe O Array probe raster scan 5 Polar array scan Polar raster scan Polar raster scan Get position from Encoder Encoder trigger Hanis Enc Theta L scari Circumferential axis 0 000 deg Size 360 000 deg Grid resolution 0 500 From deg smpl Acquisition rate Sampling clack Internal clack 800 0000 Hz Actual B00 Hz 2 00 Aequested C scan onentation i a 1 LF Absolute Encoders Y axis Enc Radius Axial axis 20 0000 mm Size 150 0000 mar Grid resolution 0 5000 rm smpl Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 2 Figure 3 79 137 In the Scan type section select Polar raster scan under 2D surface scan When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Parameters window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder For more information on
22. If the encoder providing the angular position is set in millimeters or inches you will have to specify the encoder path diameter in the Encoder path diameter field this information is used to convert the length in degrees If the encoder is already set in degrees you will have nothing to specify Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 6 In the C scan subsection define the range of values used to display C scans in a data pane Figure 3 77 The C scan subsection ic Circumferential axis Axial axis From ooo 8F t deg 0 0000 mm Size 360 000 deg Size 32 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 500 deg smpl Grid resolution 0 5000 mm smpl Under the Circumferential axis column enter the scan starting point in degrees in the From field and the resolution that you want to use for your grid the number of degrees covered to constitute a sample in the Grid resolution field Under the Axial axis column enter the starting radius of the inspected area in the field the external radius of the polar scan in the Size field and the resolution that you want to use for your grid the distance covered along the X axis to constitute a sample in the Grid resolution field 7 Click OK when you are done setting up your scan parameters Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to the Magnifi application Click Cancel to discard all the modifications that you made Configuring Scan Parameters
23. Right click vertical drag Left click Right click SHIFT left click horizontal drag Left click drag Left click Right click oa oe oa oe me a gt Displays a list of channels Click any to select Changes to previous channel in list Changes to next channel in list Toggles the view between horizontal vertical amplitude and phase components Displays a list to choose the data type Changes to the previous scale on the list Changes to the next scale on the list Opens a list of voltage values Click any to select Increases Decreases the voltage value Marks in green the selected area Release the mouse button to zoom in Moves the red cursors to the location of the click Opens a contextual menu Moves the data on the strip chart left or right Moves cursor Moves red cursor to that location preserving spacing between cursors Moves the closest dotted red cursors to that location changing the spacing between cursors Appendix D Table D 1 Mouse and keyboard functions continued 327 CTRL left click dragging the pointer out of the strip chart Anywhere Red dot cursors Frequency Coil Left click drag Left click Right click Left click Right click Link views Left click Link views Right click Link views Middle click Left click Right click Label In Strip Charts f i i Wa
24. Wall thickness Minimum wall Wall loss Maximum wall Main cursor Difference Main cursor Difference OK V Use abbreviations In the Available Information Fields section check the boxes for the information fields that you want to display They appear in the Information Field Ordering list From that list you can order the fields using the arrow buttons The first information field is the list will appear to the left hand side of the view when you click OK If you uncheck an information field in the Available Information Fields list it is removed from the Information Fields Ordering column If you check that information field again it is added at the end of the Information Fields Ordering list 4 Click OK The Information Fields window disappears and the selected information fields appears in the proper view Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 61 Figure 1 73 Projection view with displayed information fields Note E Wall Thickness 1 94 mm Wall Loss Percent 29 9 Inside Diameter 22 6 mm Outside Diameter 26 4 mm Axial Extent 750 0 mm Circumferental Extent 180 0 deg ID You can also display the information field titles with abbreviations To do so make sure to check the Use abbreviations box in the bottom left of the Information Fields window This will allow you to display more information fields at a time Figure 1 74 Projection view with abbreviated in
25. 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s m m Time slot qty N Activate interpolation w Stabilization time Type A demodulator v Control curent V 0 00 gt alu Acquisition rate 4000 Hz Activate scaling e e e o o co oicoio i oi oi io o o o oj ojojo Defining Global Channel Parameters As its name implies global channel parameters affect all the channel parameters when working with a legacy unit see Figure C 6 To set global channel parameters 1 2 In the Frequency qty box type the number of frequencies max 8 used for the current configuration In the Time slot qty box type the number of time slots used in the current configuration You cannot have more than 16 time slots To interpolate values between time slots select the Activate interpolation check box When using a multiplexer select your type of demodulator on the Stabilization time list If your demodulator requires a long stabilization period select Type A demodulator Otherwise select Type B demodulator In the Control current V box type the maximum voltage for the digital analog converter output between 1 and 10 In the Acquisition rate box type the acquisition rate in Hz To scale the acquired data select the Activate scaling check box You can activate gathering certain types of data by the test unit To do so move the slider of the Activate dat
26. Acquisition clock which is the most common setting for single axis scans the estimated probe speed that you enter 1s used to determine the position of each data point Acquisition density and resolution are automatically calculated based on the entered parameters Configuring Scan Parameters 107 108 5 Inthe Strip chart section select the data that you want to view and how it should be displayed Figure 3 38 The Strip chart section Strip chart Time Distance C Sample Vertical scale 10 3 Direction Up Down a Select whether the data is time based in seconds distance based an mm or sample based samples pixel Distance based strip charts are available when using encoders or non standard clocks b Enter the vertical scale that you want to use The unit indicated is linked to the type of data selected in the previous substep time distance or sample c Inthe Direction subsection select whether new data is added to the bottom of the strip chart For more information on data direction see page 45 6 When you are done setting up your scan parameters click OK Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to Magnifi Click Cancel to discard all the modifications that you made Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 109 For Tube Bore Scans with Rotating Probes To set up scan parameters for tube bore scans with rotating probes and for IRIS inspections
27. Define the parameters of the scan Scan type and axis Start position obtained from Acquisition rate Typical probe speed Typical axis parameters If you use an encoder you will also be prompted to define its resolution Data definition Define the data used during inspection as necessary Channels and or C scans Frequencies Mixes Also select the Ectane connector used to acquire this data when the selection is possible Data processing Decide which filters low pass high pass are applied to your working data Calibration point Define your calibration points Name Side Size Units of measurement Indication codes Define the indication codes necessary during inspection By default the wizard comes with a default list of indication codes but you can modify the list and add to it as necessary Calibration Define the calibration characteristics of the channels that you are using Amplitude and phase value Reference Measure Chapter 2 Preparing Acquisition Setups with the Wizard Sizing curves Create the sizing curves that you need Curve ID Name Source Measure component Method Shape etc You can add as many sizing curves as necessary You are prompted to define the details of each curve including the calibration points used to build the curve as you add them Data display Select how to display strip charts an
28. Deg 2 To change the gain double click in the Gain field and enter a new value 3 To change the frequencies double click the values to change in the Value kHz column and enter new values as required 4 Ifyou use more than one generator click the appropriate generator number adjacent to the Generator label 5 To change the amplitude select the Amplitude V tab and double click the values to change in the Tn column 6 Enter new values 7 To change the phase select the Phase Deg tab and double click the values to change in the Tn column 8 Enter new values and click OK Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 225 Performing Acquisitions in Setup Mode You can perform basic acquisitions while still in Setup mode This can be useful when you need to see what acquisition data will look like but in a more information oriented purpose like when you are fine tuning a setup Performing acquisitions in Setup mode allows you to perform a system calibration and change acquisition parameters some of which you cannot change once you are in Acquisition mode Data collected in Setup mode is not saved For more information on saving data see Saving Data on page 228 Before you start an acquisition you have to balance your inspection hardware Balancing The purpose of balancing is to eliminate the signal seen by the probe when it is placed over a sound area of a part to inspect This operation resets the signal
29. Double clicking once displays the ascending order icon oul Double clicking twice displays the descending order icon is Double clicking three times displays no icons at all indicating that no particular sort order will be used for values in this column Once you have defined your sort order click OK The sort order is saved and will be used the next time you click Sort in the Report window or select Sort from the contextual menu Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data Printing Previewing Reports After you have finished editing your acquisition report you can print it if necessary To do so 1 From the Report window click Print or right click anywhere on the list in the Report window or report status and select Print from the contextual menu that appears The Report preview window opens The report is formatted in a certain way that is not necessarily representative of the way data is displayed in the Report window itself Figure 5 35 The Report preview window Report Indications Report Tolle S00 Leb beta hjm Code A iiyit ECA Enecirclimng 2 Click Print Setup if necessary to configure your printing setup This simply opens your default printer driver configuration Refer to your printer documentation for more information on configuring your printer driver 5 3 Click Print The report as displayed in the Report preview window is t ja Epa Epam wilje le bye maj wa ja w
30. Event Read from channel Dragging a handle 7 After you have finished adding events and linking them click OK This processed channel will be saved in the setup file Deleting Processing Units To delete a processing unit simply select it and click Remove selected unit You can also select the unit and press the DEL key or right click the unit that you want to remove and select Delete Unit from the contextual menu that appears Editing Processing Units Save for the Event Start event most processing units are editable To edit a processing unit simply double click its icon The appropriate dialog box appears where you can modify specific processing parameters The most often used processing units are explained below Note You can also right click the unit whose parameters you want to edit and select Edit Unit from the contextual menu that appears Editing the Event Processing Unit The Event processing unit simply acts as a starting point for a signal processing sequence Nothing about it can be modified This processing unit must be selected tart first for the other processing units to become available Setting Up Processed Channels 150 Editing the Read from channel Processing Unit The Read from channel processing unit allows you to choose the channels whose ee Readfrom signals will be processed To select channels 1 Double click the processing unit icon the Re
31. Horizontal Trigger and Axial Encoder and Vertical Trigger and Axial Encoder If you selected encoders from the Get position from drop down list check the Absolute Encoders box if necessary When this option is enabled the position is always positive If you selected an encoder in step 5a select the appropriate encoder s for the circumferential and or axial axes in the Encoder trigger subsection In the Resolution check subsection define the resolution parameters that will be used during acquisitions The Resolution check subsection Resolution check Tube ID 20 0000 mm Circumferential axis Axial axis Minimum density 1 0000 amplmm 30000 amplmm Speed rotation BO o000 Ips 25 0000 mms Acquisition density 2732 ampl mm 2 0000 ampl mm Acquisition resolution 0 7854 mm smpl 0 5000 mmsmpl Maximum probe speed 63 6620 rps 25 0000 mmis a Enter the tube internal diameter in the Tube ID field b Inthe Minimum density fields under the Circumferential axis and Axial axis columns enter the number of samples that you want to take per unit of distance In the Speed rotation fields under the Circumferential axis and Axial axis columns enter the speed at which the probe will travel along both axes Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 113 Once all this data is entered Magnifi calculates acquisition density and resolution as well as the maximum probe speed 8 In the C scan subsection define the range of values
32. The color palettes disappear and the new color is selected Configuring Information Fields Information fields are available in both projection and A scan views Information fields give you immediate contextual values for each view in which they are displayed They apply to IRIS inspections and cursor positions For IRIS inspections only projection values can be displayed For cursor positions you can display various channel C scan C scan subtraction and UT wall values To display information fields a 1 From a projection view or an A scan view click the Information Field customization button The AScanVideo Information Fields or Projection Information Fields window appears Their content is similar Managing Views Figure 1 72 Note Information Fields window UT Wall Values IRIS Projection Inside Radius Outside Radius H V Inside Diameter V Outside Diameter V Wall Thickness Minimum Wall Thickness V Wall Loss Percent V Circumferential Extent E Axial Cursor Position J Axial Btent Maximum Wall Loss Percent E Circumferential Cursor Position f Projection Information Fields a Available Infomation Fields Infomation Field Ordering Name Description Wall Thickness m Wall Loss Percent Channel Inside Diameter C Scan Outside Diameter C Scan Subtraction Axial Extent Circumferential Extent Inside radius Outside radius Inside diameter Outside diameter
33. in deg The selected measurement unit has no impact on the application wide measurement unit selected in the General tab of the Preferences window see Setting Measurement Units on page 73 Click in the Resolution field and enter the number of counts per unit of distance In the Filter column select the low pass filter that you want to apply to remove noise or to prevent triggering on glitches In the External sub column from the Preset column select what action must be performed by the encoder at the start of the acquisition None no action is performed at the start of the acquisition PresetActiveLow the acquisition starts when the logical level reaches OV PresetActiveHigh the acquisition starts when the logical level reaches 5V In the Action On Start sub column select whether Preset or not None an external source will be the trigger for the preset In the Value column determine the value at which the preset will start Click Next gt gt to move to the next configuration step Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 103 Configuring IRIS specific Parameters Once you have clicked Next you are brought to the IRIS Application Definition page Figure 3 30 The IRIS Application Definition page p x Appixation Wizard Ieee IRIS Applicaton Debrsbon Set IRIS specrbcs parameters Tube Nomina Measuremeres Outside Diameter 25 400 wm Mall Thickness 2600 mn
34. information on defining encoders see page 82 Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 111 Figure 3 41 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Note Acquisition rate Sampling clack Internal clock r Requested 4000 0000 Hz Actual 4000 Hz From the Sampling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate is controlled by an internal clock an external clock or a preset encoder If you chose Internal clock enter the acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field If you chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use If you chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested acquisition rate in the Requested field and the maximum acquisition rate in the Max acquisition rate field Depending on how the encoder is defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones selected for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 73 4 In the C scan orientation section s
35. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Y pos 213 50 213 00 213 75 253 25 102 50 120 50 139 75 162 50 204 25 204 50 213 50 213 00 213 75 253 25 102 50 120 50 139 75 162 50 Y leng 6 0000 4 0000 4 5000 70 500 3 0000 2 0000 1 5000 1 0000 9 5000 7 0000 6 0000 4 0000 4 5000 70 500 3 0000 2 0000 1 5000 1 0000 Y axis units mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Insert Insert Copy Delete DeleteAl Edit Sot Print Options 2 Click the down arrow next to the Export button A list of export formats appears 3 Select the format in which you want to export The most commonly used are Text File for future import in TubePro Carto for future import in Carto Clipboard for future use in general software like Microsoft Word or Excel 4 Click Export A standard Save As window appears 5 Browse to the location where you want to export the report and click Save The report is exported in the selected format Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 288 Quick Troubleshooting Guide Table 6 1 Problems Possible Causes Solutions Network card not set properly Make sure that your network card is in DHCP protocol Please refer to computer manufacturer documentation Network settings incorrect on
36. report The acquisition and analysis folder are selected at the same time Opening Inspection Projects 248 Creating Inspection Lists Before performing acquisitions it is necessary to create an inspection list The format of the inspection list is defined when you create or open an inspection project see Opening Inspection Projects on page 246 Figure 4 31 The different looks of an inspection list Setup l Acquis Analysis Setup Acquis Analysis C Users PSam Data C Users PSam Data C Name TEST TEST insert Row 1 Col 1 13 total 0 inspected Stat Next In Freeform Format To create an inspection list 1 From the Acquis tab click Insert A first row is created 2 Name the first row You are now ready to start inspection After starting and stopping the first acquisition a new row is automatically created when you click Next Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 249 In Zone Row Column Format To create an inspection list 1 From the Acquis tab click Insert A first row is created The first row always starts at 0 Usually users that work with rows and columns tend to create all their rows first 2 Add rows by clicking Row l Go back to each row and add columns by clicking Col 1 a 4 If you are working in Zone Row Column format you can add a new zone by clicking Insert again Note To increase the row and column num
37. select the Present check box 2 If your DefHi probe contains reference coils select the Use reference coils check box 3 On the Impedance Bridge group s list select the appropriate bridge impedance 4 In the Gain text box type an appropriate value 5 In the Channel prefix text box type a channel prefix The resulting channel name is displayed in the Resulting Channel Name box 6 To enable channel groups select the Absolute and or Differential check box in the Channel Groups group You can also assign prefixes to these channel groups in the Prefix box in the appropriate column 7 Specify the frequency in kHz the amplitude in V and the phase in degrees for each necessary group of channels a To add frequencies click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups group This adds a new data line maximum of five under the first where you can also enter an appropriate frequency amplitude and phase 8 When you have finished configuring the topology click Finish Your Ectane is now properly configured Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 97 Configuring Defi Double Row Topologies To configure DefHi double row topology array parameters Figure 3 25 DefHi double row topology array parameters Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders z General DefHiDoubleRow T1 l Topologies Parameters for the selected topology Connector ECA Array Bobbin Total coil quantity 24 Channel Groups Cire
38. to display in the info bar and the status bar Click OK to save changes and return to the Magnifi main window or Cancel to discard the changes that you made before returning to the Magnifi main window The info and status bars now reflect the changes that you made The parameters available for display depend on the type of scan selected whether or not encoders are used etc For more information on scan type selection see Configuring Scan Parameters on page 104 and for encoder selection and configuration see Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups on page 81 Configuring the Info and Status Bars Switching between Operation Magnifi offers three operation modes Setup Acquisition Analysis There are two different methods of switching between operation modes from the control bar or from the Operation menu To switch modes from the control bar click the appropriate tab Figure 1 9 Switching operation mode from the control bar left and from the Operation menu right m Magnifi 3 26273 Default setup File View Settings Operation 3 e a l Ml amp ar Code Setup Acquis Analysis CAU default magsetup Setup Automatic recording Scan parameters Sizing curves C scan Processed channels Layouts 3176 Default setup tings Layouts Special Help ly G Setup mode Acquisition mode b fi Anal Analysis mode gsetup _ 4 Connect to Instr
39. we Van i j Sean Duration H mr PETT i H a irii Gee 230 d T ST a 1 na oo i i Terai 200 000 Y Da i 2 e if Faa RPS j i i f 4 Input iter 25 24 Meg m ai ri Plectification Tee 7 li ri k j Taed Filer 75 MHz 1 T i J F T r m T a am ra i i j a i Tae sla M aaa Se OSOS I ee A e d a i Sa So Se ee ee a Performing IRIS specific Tasks 238 Calibrating Systems Once your Ectane is properly connected and your setup is usable you need to calibrate the system to ensure accurate results You can calibrate from many data sources gt gt gt Channels Channels and sizing curves Sizing curves C scan C scan and sizing curves IRIS Landmarks Calibrating Channels To do so 1 Load an existing setup for more information see Opening Inspection Projects on page 246 2 Balance the probe on a sound area see Balancing on page 225 3 Acquire data from the calibration sample block or tube 4 Select Operation gt System Calibration or click System calibration from i the General toolbar The Calibration window appears Figure 4 21 The Calibration window amp Calibration Channel Channel and Sizing Curves Sizing Curves C scan C scan and Sizing Curves IRIS Landmark Hole SUPPORT FBH 60 FBH 80 FBH 40 FBH 4x20 IDGR 10 Chapter 4
40. 03 02 14 57 2010 11 25 10 36 011 05 16 11 32 2010 10 12 14 04 2010 09 08 09 55 2011 05 16 11 31 2010 11 25 10 37 2010 11 25 10 37 2011 08 15 14 59 2010 09 09 10 16 Processing DLL 2 Find the processing file d that you need and double click it You return to Magnifi as if nothing happened but the processing file that you just selected is now registered 3 Restart Magnifi From now on the processing file that you registered will be available from the Add Data Processing window Managing C scans 180 Managing Landmarks In Magnifi you can manage landmarks manually or automatically The following pages explain how to do both Below is the list of operations to perform when managing landmarks Set the direction of the displayed data for more information see Configuring General Strip Chart Parameters on page 44 Build a landmark table Set the landmark positioning options Manually place landmarks Building Landmark Tables Magnifi allows you to create landmarks in software provided that you know the exact position of each of these landmarks Note Jf you do not know the exact position of the landmarks it is better to simply enter begin and end landmarks To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Landmarks The Landmarks window appears Figure 3 126 he Landmarks window pe Landmarks Name Type Position mm Add Positi
41. 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 191 Selecting the Content of a Column In the Probe Manager window not only can you sort its content you can also filter out the information that you do not want or need to see To do so 1 From any column in the Probe Manager click the funnel icon A selection menu appears Figure 3 137 Selection menu and funnel icon Funnel icon A Model Catalog Number Rod PolarRaste Rod Polar cil Probe Mapp cil Polar Raster rosion Mapping v Select AIl v ECT esonic Probe cil Probe aici dll ble Row E Selection J NFT menu v RFT i Single Row P Array Probe L Probe Probe Cancel Probe GE New ee Edit sai Import Export Update amp 2 Check the boxes next to the elements that you want to see in the Probe Manager list You can quickly select all elements by checking the Select All box 3 Click OK Only the probes corresponding to the elements that you selected now appear in the list The others have been filtered out Note From the selection menu you can also decide to sort the column content in alphabetical order or in reverse alphabetical order Managing Probes 192 Adding Probes From the Probe Manager you can add a user probe via the Probe Wizard Important The choices offered by the wizard change based on 1 selections made from top to bottom in every st
42. 4 Configure the added sizing curve Enter a one or two character identification in the ID field optional but very useful if you have more than one curve for the same channel or C scan Enter the name of the sizing curve in the Name column Select the inspection technique in the Technique drop down list Select what the sizing curve will be based on from the Based on drop down list Sizing can be based on channels or C scans along the X or Y axis Select the source of the sizing curve data in the Source drop down list Select the type of sizing curve Amplitude or Phase in the Type drop down list 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add as many sizing curves as needed and when done click Next gt gt Setting Up Sizing Curves 202 Configuring Calibration Points for Sizing Curves To configure calibration points 1 In the Calibration Points page add all calibration points used in your calibration sample and fill the name side and size of these calibration points In the Side column the available choices depend on the inspection type selected in the previous step Through defect that is going through the entire thickness of the inspected part applies to plates as well as tubes Far defect located on the far side of the inspected part appears as OD for tubes Near defect located on the near side of the inspected part surface breaking defect appears as ID for tubes None when the technique used cannot discrimi
43. A sign of a corrupted firmware is that the Ectane does not appear in the Instrument Connection window There are other reasons why an Ectane instrument would not appear in the Instrument Connection window see Table 6 1 on page 288 To fix a corrupted firmware 1 Bh Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Open the Ectane battery compartment and locate the backup firmware button next to the battery slot please refer to the Ectane instruction manual to locate this button Press the backup firmware button then press the power switch Release the backup firmware button and wait for the Ectane to boot completely Click Connect to an instrument or select Connect to Instrument from the Operation menu The Instrument Connection window appears The Ectane should now appear in the window if not call Eddyfi The Instrument Connection window z Instrument Connection Ectane Type Model MAC Address Host Status Config Details Ectane 256 EC 92 33 00 FF FF WA O Click in the Config column The Instrument Configuration window appears The Instrument Configuration window G Instrument Configuration Network Infomation Embedded Software Update mah Static IP Address Use the embedded software that comes with Magnifi IPaddress 192 168 100 1 Use custom embedded software 4 L Subnet Mask 255 255 255 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Chapter 6 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 293 6 Click
44. ABS D180 R_D180 Scale DIF R_D90 Scale DIF D90 2 R_D90 2 Scale DIF p90 8 R_D90 8 Scale DIF V Displayable output standard display mode Lox J 2 Inthe Channel name creation method section select whether you want to name the new output channels manually Free style or automatically Replacement If you selected Free style you can then double click the names in the Output column and change them to any name that you want If you selected Replacement the text boxes on the same line From character no Number of characters and with become active In the From character no box enter the position of the character after which characters will be replaced If you enter 0 the new characters specified in the with field are placed at the beginning of the filename In the Number of characters box enter the number of characters to replace in the input channel name If you enter 0 characters will be added to the output channel name In the with box enter the character that will replace or be added to the character s that you defined in the two previous boxes Examples of output channel character replacements R_A90 8 0 0 T TR_A90 8 R_A90 8 1 0 T RT_A90 8 R_A90 8 0 1 T T_A90 8 Setting Up Processed Channels 160 Table 3 1 Examples of output channel character replacements continued R_A90 8 1 1 T RTA90 8 R_A90 8 2 2 T R_T0 8 R_A90 8 2 2 TC R_TC0 8 5 Click OK The Copy to
45. Axial Enabled v v Gain 23 dB Prefix c A Pole spacing 12 Resulting Channe Name T1F1G1001 Chanel prefix 11 Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg 6 2 50 0 0 Probe Protection Minimum Frequency Allowed 100 kHz Maximum Amplitude Allowed 8 00 V Add tet nnd 1 In the Total coil quantity text box type the number of coils in your probe The Pole spacing list is always configured to 12 for DefHi probes 2 In the Gain text box type the required gain 3 In the Channel prefix text box type a channel prefix The resulting channel name is indicated in the Resulting Channel Name box 4 To properly protect the probe specify the allowed minimum frequency and maximum amplitude in the Minimum frequency allowed and Maximum amplitude allowed text boxes of the Probe Protection group 5 To enable channel groups select the Cire and or Axial check box in the Channel Groups group You can also assign prefixes to channel groups in the Prefix text box in the appropriate column 6 Type the frequency in kHz the amplitude in V and the phase in degrees that you need for the Circ group a To add frequencies click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups group This adds a new data line maximum of five under the first where you can also enter the proper frequency amplitude and phase Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups To configure DefHi double row topology bobbin parameters Figure 3
46. Circle 1 Circle 2 a visual aid representing a voltage scale around the central point Serpentine number of points displayed during an acquisition older points are deleted Depth vs phase indicator in cases where the sizing curve 1s of the phase type allows you to display visual aids to help correlate angles and depths O outside I inside Red dot at cursor center indicate with a red dot the position of the data selection cursor on the equivalent strip chart Show strip chart displays mini strip charts at the bottom of the Lissajous 4 Inthe Data type section you can select the type of data displayed either from channels 1 e for bobbin probes or from C scan axes i e from array probes 5 In the Colors section you can choose the colors that you want to use for the strip chart These colors are the same as the ones defined in Configuring Views Colors on page 40 6 Click OK when you are done The selected options now appear in the Lissajous Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 53 Configuring Voltage Plane Views Voltage plane displays inspection results similar to a Lissajous in that it represents on two axes the vertical and horizontal components of a signal but it also adds a skin depth attenuation curve that is very helpful when analyzing RFT inspection data In Magnifi you can configure parameters that apply to each voltage plane individually To do so 1 Right click over a displayed voltage plane A
47. Click Add A new empty line is added at the bottom of the list 3 Enter the name of the material in the Name column 4 Enter the ultrasound velocity in the material in the Ultrasound Velocity m s column 5 Enter the material s electrical resistivity in the Electrical Resistivity Q2 m column 6 Enter the material s magnetic permeability in the Magnetic Permeability column 7 If necessary you can enter notes relative to this newly created material 8 Click OK The new material is saved Managing Materials 188 Copying Existing Materials Copying an existing material is generally used when that existing material already has most the characteristics of a new material that you want to add This speeds up the process because you do not have to re enter all the parameters for the new material To copy an existing material 1 On the Settings menu click Materials The Materials dialog box appears 2 In the list of existing materials select the one that you want to copy 3 Click Copy A new line is created at the bottom of the list It contains the same information as the one that was selected before you clicked Copy Figure 3 135 Copied material Materials Custom Materials N Ultrasound Electrical Magnetic ae Velocity ms Resistivity Qm Permeability Remove Remove All Notes for selected material Import 4 Modify the given information as needed material name ultrasound velocity etc
48. Configuring Double Driver Topologies To configure double driver topologies Figure 3 19 Double driver topology parameters a Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders Gand Double Driver T1 Topologies Parameters for the selected topology Double Driver T1 Coil quantity 34 Channel Groups Axial Transversal Pole spacing 12 v Enabled 7 7 Is circular Prefix A T Gain 23 dB Channel prefix T1 Resulting Channel Name T1F1T001 Probe Protection Minimum frequency allowed 100 000 kHz Maximum amplitude allowed 8 00 V Enter the number of coils in your probe in the Coil quantity field Select the required spacing between poles in the Pole spacing drop down list Check the Is circular box if your double driver probe is circular Enter the required gain in the Gain field Enter a channel prefix in the Channel prefix field The resulting channel name is indicated in the Resulting Channel Name field 6 To properly protect the probe enter the minimum frequency and maximum amplitude allowed in the Minimum frequency allowed and Maximum amplitude allowed fields of the Probe Protection section 7 To enable channel groups check the Axial and or Transversal box es in the Channel Groups section You can also assign prefixes to these channel groups in the Prefix fields under the appropriate column 8 Enter the frequency amplitude and phase for each channel group that you need To add frequenci
49. Configuring Ectane IRIS Acquisition Setups on page 100 and before performing a calibration you need to validate your detection gate settings The IRIS Application Wizard normally places gates very close to where they should be but depending on the probe and turbine model you are using you may need to perform some adjustments These adjustments are performed from an A scan view The target pin gate gray is used to detect the rotation synchronization signal generated by the target pin located on the turbine The front wall gate red is used to detect the echo coming from the internal diameter of the tube also called the front wall echo The back wall gate blue is used to detect the echo coming from the external diameter of the tube also called the back wall echo Preparing for Gate Adjustments Before adjusting the gates you need to perform a couple of operations 1 Display the A scan view in your layout see Elements of an A scan on page 23 2 Start the rotation of the turbine and submerge it in water Performing IRIS specific Tasks 234 Adjusting the Target Pin Gate To adjust the target pin gate 1 2 Figure 4 17 Start a Magnifi acquisition Click View Envelope see Elements of an A scan on page 23 Since the refresh rate of the A scan is much lower than that of a C scan it may take a few seconds before the target pin signal starts to appear in the A scan With the mouse mo
50. Encirching PP VPP 30000 i 0 5 40 37 test yung Curc 0 0000 ECA Encirching VP 2 0000 4 0 0 383 212 tetjung Circ 0 0000 ECA Encircling pp VPP 1 5000 5 0 0 382 212 tetjung Circ 0 0000 ECA Encircling PP VPP 1 0000 6 0 0 12 23 35 test jung Circ 0 0000 ECA Encireling pp VPP 9 5000 0 0 1245 a5 test Jung Cec 0 0000 ECA Encircling PP VPP 70000 R 0 0 1138 a test jung Cec 0 0000 ECA Encirchng pp VPP 60000 i Insert Entry 11 0 6 10 211 test jung ri insert Copy of Entry 12 0 0 753 221 s test jung Ciec 0 Edit Entry 13 0 0 840 37 test jung Circ 0 Edit multiple entries 14 0 0 383 22 testjung Ciee a Delete Entry 16 0 0 12 23 35 test jung Cec g Delete All Entries 17 0 0 1245 215 test jung Circ 0 Print 19 0 0 400 5 test jung Circ 0 Options 2 0 0 435 26 tetjung Circ 0 a 0 0 610 211 __ testjung Ciee a Onplay profiles 22 0 0 753 21 tetjung Ciee a Copy Content to Clipboard 23 0 0 8 40 37 test jung Cec g Sort 24 0 0 3 83 212s test_ jung2 Circ 0 Undo Last 25 0 0 382 212s test_jung2 Cire One a ne corer cerry ee 2 0 0 12 23 35 s test jung2 Cire 0 0000 ECA Encircling PP y 0 0 1245 25 test jung Ciec 0 0000 ECA Encircling pp 28 0 0 1188 28 test jung Cire 0 0000 ECA Encireling pp 2 0 0 400 s9 tost Jung Cec 0 0000 ECA Encwrchng PP 31 0 0 6 10 21 test jung Cec 0 0000 ECA bnciching pp 32 0 0 753 221s test_jung2 Circ 0 0000 ECA Encircling PP 33 0 0 8 40 37 test jung Ciee 0 0000 ECA Encircling pp x 0 0 383 22 tetjung Citt 0 0000 E
51. Lissajous Working with Zooms Magnifi allows you to set predefined zoom levels that can later be accessed from the Analysis toolbar To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences The Preferences window appears 2 Click the Analysis tab see Figure 5 1 3 In the Fixed zoom section enter different scales n mm or in in the Zoom 1 and Zoom 2 boxes 4 Click OK The fixed zooms are set To quickly access the set zoom levels click the Fixed Zoom 1 or Fixed Zoom 2 buttons in the Analysis toolbar You can also go back to the previous zoom level by clicking the Previous zoom button Measuring Indications 262 Selecting Data in Strip Charts Note Note For more information on view interface elements see Elements of a Lissajous on page 15 or see Elements of a Voltage Plane View on page 18 The data selection is done with the data selection cursor located in the strip chart view red cursors To select data 1 Click in the strip chart view to automatically bring the data selection cursor to the location of the click All the data contained within the data selection brackets red dotted lines are represented in the Lissajous or voltage plane view Click and drag the selection brackets to reduce or increase the size of the selection For a more accurate selection Magnifi offers various ways to zoom in and out For more information see Working with Zooms on page 261 Figur
52. Parameters 114 For Tube Bore Scans with Array Probes To set up scan parameters for tube bore scans with array DefHi etc probes 1 Figure 3 46 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings menu The Scan Parameters window appears The Scan Parameters window for tube bore scans with array probes Scan Parameters a Scan type Linear single axis scan bobbin Tube bore Rotating probe Array probe Rotating aray probe 2D surface scan Single channel raster scan Single pass array probe Array probe raster scan Polar array scan Polar raster scan Single pasts scan tube bore inspection aray probe Get axial position from Axial encoder Encoder tigger Resolution check Minimum density Probe speed Acquisition density Acquisition resolution Maximum probe speed C scan Circumberential axis From 0 Size 360 Display resolution 2 0000 Acquisition rate Sampling clack Requested Actual 4000 0000 agg C scan onentation J Absolute Encoders deg deg deg smpl Ok al Axial axis Encoder 1 Axial axis 2 0000 1000 0000 0 8000 1 2500 400 0000 Axial aris 0 0000 200 0000 Internal clack a srnpl ninn mms ampl mm mm smpl mms mm mm mmsmpl Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 115 2 Inthe Scan type section select Array probe under Tube bore When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Paramet
53. Performing Acquisitions 239 Select Channel or Channel and Sizing Curves this will adjust the rotation and gain of all channels that have been submitted to a Scale process see Setting Up Processed Channels on page 142 and or measure the references required to generate the sizing curve see Setting Up Sizing Curves on page 200 If you select Sizing Curves only it will perform measures similar to the other calibrations but without changing the calibration itself gain and rotation It will only measure anew the sizing curves see Setting Up Sizing Curves on page 200 Select a reference in the list underneath the calibration radio buttons The content of the list depends on the selection made in step 5 Position the data selection cursor on the signal corresponding to the reference selected previously Click the measurement button Once the reference measurement is taken a ereen check mark appears next to the reference name in the list Repeat steps 6 to 8 for all references that you want to use for calibration purposes You do not have to take measurements for all references Calibration Channels and Sizing Curves ae ore eT e eee ae e ee lL I T z a n Lasi za Lise E i fl 4 l 1 i r _ fF i i Ls Aet Fi q ET 4 L L m m Cban 7 be Channel gum hara wed Soggy Coren sh Y i Tira Eii A m a i
54. Right click Left click Left click drag Left click drag on cross extremities Right click cross lines Left click drag Middle click Right click Left click Right click ES de ae i Opens and closes the list of C scans Click any to select Changes to previous C scan in list Changes to next C scan in list Opens and closes the palette below the title bar Opens and closes the navigation panel Toggles the view among the horizontal vertical amplitude and phase components Zooms in the image C scan only Opens a contextual menu Moves the cross selection cursor to that location Moves the cross selection cursor Increases or decreases the area covered inside the cross selection cursor Opens a contextual menu Moves the subtraction cursor up and down Moves the subtraction cursor to that location Opens the Link contextual menu Click the Link command to attach the subtraction cursor to the cross selection cursor Changes to previous next frequency for the same coil Table D 3 Mouse and keyboard functions continued Coil Link views Link views Link views Label 1 Li ha Previous Next Indication Left click Right click Left click Right click Middle click Left click Right click Left click i Changes to previous next coil in the same frequency Changes to previous value Not linked 1 9 Linke
55. Symmetrical box This will ensure that when you change either value the other value follows suit symmetrically 5 If you want to apply the selected color palette to all C scans click Apply to All 6 When you are done assigning color palettes to C scans click OK Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Registering Processing 179 Eddyfi can create custom C scan processes not delivered with the standard versions of Magnifi To add theses processes for use in Magnifi you have to register them first To do so 1 From the Special menu in Magnifi select Register Processing The Select a Processing File window appears Figure 3 125 The Select a Processing File window z Ly Select a Processing File JIJ Organize v New folder Favorites Hame BD Desktop J Libraries i Downloads B Patrick Samson Dropbox j Computer E Mes documents r tu Network E Recent Places ez Tube Probe Selection Guide fa ClubSocial srvdata Libraries aig Lecteur de CD Documents 1 a Marketing srvdata amp Magnifi Data fo OS C Magnifi Setup fay PublicShare srvdata P a Music ay SoftwareArchive srvdata Pictures ay SoftwareProducts srvdata f Videos ray Transfer srvdata ay Travail jE Computer 0S C3 x File name Item type y Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut 3 Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut 3 Shortcut Date modified 11
56. and allows the system to operate over its maximum dynamic range This is an operation better performed right before commencing a large number of scans To balance your system place the probe over a sound area and click Unit Eja balancing from the Acquisition toolbar select Balancing from the Operation menu or press F6 A window appears briefly indicating that balancing is in progress Figure 4 9 Balancing in progress Ectane Balancing Progress The balancing is in progress Close if the process succeeded Once the system is balanced the window disappears and the system is ready for acquisitions If the balancing operation fails see Maintenance amp Troubleshooting on page 287 Performing Acquisitions in Setup Mode 226 Displaying Balancing Information You can view the balancing information used by the system by selecting Balance Information from the Special menu This opens a window indicating balancing values for the various inputs You can also reset the balance information by clicking Reset Balance Figure 4 10 The Balance Information window Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 227 Starting an Acquisition in Setup Mode To start an acquisition click Start from the Control bar select Start from the Operation menu or press F2 Figure 4 11 Ways to start an acquisition File View Settings Opera e t ue Setup Acquis Analysis CU default magsetup G Setup Automat
57. and rename it as well if needed The procedures to modify a layout and to rename it are explained in the following pages From Scratch To create a completely new layout 1 From the Layouts menu select Create New Layout gt Custom Layout The Create New Layout dialog box appears Figure 1 34 The Create New Layout dialog box a Create New Layout Information Please select the type of the main split Horizontal 2 1 Vertical 1 x 2 Both ways 2 x 2 eeccccccscscsccccscceccececcesseseseseseg Horizontal m x 1 Verticali xn Both ways mx n How many rows do you want to create 2 4 How many columns do you want to create 2 4 Save as New Layout E 2 Select a main split Predefined Horizontal 2x1 Vertical 1x2 or Both ways 2x2 Custom Horizontal mx 1 Vertical 1xm or Both ways mxn The How many rows columns lines appear only when you select a custom main split 3 Ifyou selected a custom main split enter the number of rows and or columns that you want in the proper dialog boxes 4 Enter a new name for the layout in the Save as text box and click Save The name of the new layout now appears and is selected in the Layouts menu When you create a new layout each pane is empty and shows a circle with Control missing in its center To assign a view to a pane see Assigning a View to a Pane on page 43 Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 33 Duplicating Lay
58. array probes Wizard Workflow cry 1 The wizard can accommodate approximately 85 of all possible inspection scenarios As such parameters adapt at each step according to your selections For example the software only suggests probes adapted to the inspection geometry tube from ID or surface that you choose To start the wizard Click Settings gt Setup Wizard gt Create New Setup or Click the Setup Wizard icon on the Setup Wizard toolbar For more customized scenarios it is possible to configure the software manually as explained later in this document see Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups on page 71 Chapter 2 Preparing Acquisition Setups with the Wizard Figure 2 1 Setup wizard workflow definition ys Probe selection Data definition Data processing Calibration point Calibration Sizing curves Indication codes Indication codes Display Display Finish Setup Wizard Probe selection i Data definition Data processing Calibration point Calibration Indication codes Sizing curves Display 67 Component definition Define the component that you need to test Geometry Unit Model type Material Dimensions Probe selection Select the probe used for inspection Use such filters as probe technique and model After filtering select one of the probes offered by Eddyfi from the list at the bottom Scan definition
59. as the acquisition file to which it is attached These comments are not associated with other acquisition files The comments are visible in Analysis mode To comment on a specific file 1 Select a file in the acquisition list Acquis tab 2 Select Add File Comments from the Operation menu or click the Add File Comments button A Message Content window opens in the centre of your screen Figure 4 35 The Message Content window Message Content Ea File Edit History This i a test comment 3 Enter the comments about this specific file 4 Click the Close button The Message Content window closes Adding Notes 254 Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions Analyzing amp Reporting Data 256 Setting Analysis Preferences To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Click the Analysis tab Figure 5 1 The Analysis tab General Display Arsen Paith Fiad poiri egs nent cain using recorded aston foam oo rer De neh cheaply dain deg lodeg conn ad Speed Actual inspection speed hs m gt wo dufomuabecalhy mange lt a an mea BS Murryn Pesiore deleih layowt on ramt daia file kad Pepshi Setup wiesg Paih Calker Fiam GTEC Documents Maea Rapa Paih EA bs Spenco iT oane Mai aa Pep edits OK Canc 3 In the Readback section a Check the Reload next data using rec
60. balance purposes in the Bal column click the drop down list to select a generator to associate with the input 3 Choose frequencies from the drop down lists under the Freq column You cannot use more that four frequencies per board This is only possible if you have entered a number greater than one in the Frequency qty field of the Global tab 4 You can enable specific inputs for each timeslot by checking the appropriate box in the Enable column Enter a timeslot name by clicking in the appropriate Name field Enter a gain value by clicking in the appropriate dB field Enter a low pass filter value by clicking in the appropriate LP field Select the appropriate Mux Selection by input When you use an MS5800 select the ECT or EC 4p option if your eddy current probe is connected to the 41 pin or 4 pin connectors respectively Select the RFT or MFL option according to the type of probe you are using 9 When you ve completed specifying all the necessary information on the three tabs click Apply All values are input in the TC7700 or MS5800 setup oS 2 Creating a Setup for the Test Unit 320 Setting Up Encoders When working with a legacy test unit like an MS5800 or TC7700 you can set various encoder parameters as explained in the following pages To access the encoder parameters select Settings gt Acquisition Setup gt Encoders You can also click the Encoder button in the TC7700 Acquisition Setup toolbar The Encod
61. by two specific elements The split line is thicker than a dependent pane split line When you place the cursor over the split line the cursor changes to indicate that you can resize the pane Creating Layouts There are four ways to create layouts in Magnifi From a template From scratch By duplicating an existing layout before modifying it By importing layouts from an existing setup file From a Template To create a new layout from a template 1 On the Layouts menu point to Create New Layout and then click a template in the list These templates are named by the elements they contain e g 4 Strip Charts 2 Lissajous Figure 1 33 Selecting a Layout Template Ji pup Teea Lirpeaste Spatial Help F Ue fe Default Laysa j E a Ba a Capabe phew Layout i Sing Charts 1 Lasati HIFI Mey Layouts 2 Sine Charts 4 Lissajous l o 4 Stine Chacts 2 Lissajaud Sine Charts 16 frip Charts 16 Strip Charts 2 Lissajous Saardird C tcan Landmark C jair Length Measurement H A Repat Vorart Repart Wide foet Isometric C scan Cian Lraou 2 Ceseans 4 Lissajeus Strip Char scan d Lissajous Sp Chart C tan 2 0 C deand d Leap Custer Layout impart Lipi Managing Layouts 32 2 Select the template on which you want to base your new layout The layout on screen changes based on your selection From there you can change the layout as much as you need to
62. channel processing unit is configured The output channels are now accessible for further processing under their new name Editing Other Processing Units The remaining processing units Derivate Detect Indication Export to File FIR Filter Normalization Slew and Turbo Mix are seldom used or are being overhauled at the time of writing Duplicating Processing Units Duplicating allows you to reuse an existing and already configured processing unit To do so 1 Select the processing unit that you want to duplicate 2 Click Clone selected unit A new but identical unit appears in the group and a number is added in parentheses to differentiate it from the original Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 161 Figure 3 103 Duplicating a processing unit ey Data Processing l Note You can also right click the unit that you want to duplicate and select Clone Unit from the contextual menu that appears Renaming Processing Units To rename a processing unit 1 Select the processing unit that you want to rename and click Rename selected unit OR Click the name of the processing unit that you want to change The name becomes editable 2 Enter the new name and either press ENTER or click outside the processing unit The new name is applied Note You can also right click the unit that you want to rename and select Rename Unit from the contextual menu that appears N
63. clock an external clock or a preset encoder b Ifyou chose Internal clock enter the acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field c Ifyou chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use d If you chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested acquisition rate in the Requested field and the maximum acquisition rate in the Max acquisition rate field Note Depending on how the encoder is defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones you selected for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 73 4 In the C scan orientation section select the button representing the orientation that you want to use for C scans X and Y axes This only affects how data is displayed is has no effect on the scan itself Figure 3 70 The C scan orientation section C scan orientation al Ed b Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 131 In the Raster
64. contextual menu appears Figure 1 62 Voltage plane contextual menu Measure Amplitude Phase Best Fit Properties 2 Select Properties The Properties window for this voltage plane appears Figure 1 63 Voltage plane Properties window Properties Serpentine 500 pts Tolerence 30 Degree V Depth Vs Phase indicator Use cursor position for normalization Ok Cancel Managing Views 04 3 Serpentine indicate the number of points displayed during an acquisition older points are deleted 4 Tolerance indicates a threshold from which angle corrections following normalization are displayed in red 5 Depth vs phase indicator in cases where the sizing curve is of the phase type allows you to display visual aids to help correlate angles and depths O outside I inside 6 Use cursor position for normalization allows you to perform a normalization by using only the data selection brackets applies only if data is acquired without balancing 7 Click OK when you are done The selected options now appear in the voltage plane Configuring Side Views Side views displays inspection results horizontally rather than vertically strip chart In Magnifi you can configure parameters that apply to each side view individually To do so 1 Right click over a displayed side view A contextual menu appears Figure 1 64 Side view contextual menu Adjust From To cursor Best Fit Properties
65. continue Finalizing installation Cance Appendix A Figure A 2 Accepting the license agreement Reinstalling the Software 299 End User License Agreement MAGNIFI Software License Agreement a Rev 2 May 2014 E This is a legal agreement Please read the terms and conditions of this agreement carefully before continuing Once you have read and accepted the terms and conditions of this agreement please note that by installing copying downloading accessing of otherwise using the Software product you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement If you do not accept the agreement or if you disagree with any of the terms and conditions outlined herein please note that in this case you may not use the Software under any circumstances lf you have already purchased the Software Please return it to Eddyfi or to the point of purchase for a refund 41 Definitions 1 1 Eddy NOT inc is a federal corporation legally constituted under the laws of ka 300 Figure A 3 Installing the software Ready to Install eddy The Setup Wizard is ready to begin the Magnifi 3 0B3 Q Collecting information a Q Preparing installation Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings dick Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard O Installing Finalizing installation Installing Magnifi 3 0B3 eddy Collecting information Q Prepari
66. default scale subsection choose the scale that you want to apply to the C scan Display all no scrolling the entire C scan data is displayed in the view Specific scale allows you to enter the exact size that you want to give to the C scan 6 Once you are done click OK The C scan views will be properly configured Managing C scans mm 177 178 Changing C scan Palettes in Use C scan data is displayed using a color palette Each C scan can have its own color palette To change the color palette for a specific C scan 1 Select C scan Palette from the Operation menu or click C scan palette from the C scan toolbar The C scan Palette window appears Figure 3 124 The C scan Palette window C Scan Palette C scan selection CF Falette selection Rainbow From To 0 50 Volts 0 50 Volts Os Symmetrical Cancel Apoly to All 2 From the C sean selection drop down list select the C scan to which you want to attribute a color palette 3 From the Palette selection drop down list select one of the color palettes offered The selected palette appears in the box underneath the drop down list and is automatically applied to all the C scan views corresponding to the C scan selected in step 2 4 You can change the limit values in volts for either extremities of the color palette using the From and To text boxes To keep these values symmetrical on both sides of the 0 check the
67. dot at center Hide rotation number Choose v Display measurement vector V Display mini strip charts tame splitting C scan Type Display grid Horizontal Characters for prefix orizonta Vertical Characters for suffix erica C scan acquisition default scale C scan Type Display all no scrolling Specific scale Characters for prefix Characters for suffix Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 49 3 In the General display preferences section select the measurement tools see Figure 1 59 that you want to display by checking the appropriate boxes a To display the null mark a blue cross check the Display null mark box b To display a red dot corresponding to the data selection cursor position check the Display red dot at center box c To display the measurement vector when automatic measurements are active check the Display measurement vector box 4 In the Lissajous section you can specify certain rotation parameters a inthe Rotation angle mark text box enter the required angle at which you want to rotate your signal to better see all the relevant information The default value is 40 The mark appears when you rotate the Lissajous see Figure 1 59 b You can also prevent the rotation number from appearing in the channel C scan management bar by selecting Hide rotation number This will hide the rotation number control thus preventing rotation of the Lissajous directly on screen Manual rotation can
68. for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 73 4 In the C scan orientation section select the button representing the orientation that you want to use for C scans X and Y axes This only affects how data is displayed is has no effect on the scan itself Figure 3 48 The C scan orientation section C scan onentation el A b Important In a tube bore configuration the X axis represents the circumference while the Y axis represents the length of the tube Configuring Scan Parameters 116 5 In the Single pass scan tube bore inspection array probe section configure your basic scan parameters Figure 3 49 The Single pass scan tube bore inspection array probe section Figure 3 50 Single pazs scan tube bore inspection array probe Get axial position from Axial encoder J Absolute Encoders Encoder trigger Axial axis Encoder 1 Er ES In the Get axial position from drop down list select what device will provide probe positions Acquisition clock Non standard clock Axial encoder If you selected Axial encoder from the Get axial position from drop down list check the Absolute Encoders box if necessary This option allows you to use negative and positive position values If you selected an encoder in step 5a select the appropriate encoder for the axial axis in the Encoder trigger subsection In the Resolution check subsec
69. in the Info bar see Control and Info Bars on page 5 but it also indicates the connection status between the program and an acquisition instrument the Ectane battery status and the time of day synchronized with the workstation internal clock Battery and connection status icons are explained in more details on page 219 Figure 1 5 The status bar Y smpt 0000 omel K smpt 27700 smol Paw mgt f f Myf 1277901 onl Battery status Connection status Time Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Control and Info Bars On the left side of the display you find the control and info bars as well as the Acquisition Notepad toolbar These interface elements can be displayed hidden when selected from the View menu Figure 1 6 The control and info bars as well as the Acquisition Notepad toolbar r uj Magnifi 3 1B2T2 Default setup File View Settings Operation S t 9 Setup Acquis Analysis ae C U defaultmagsetup C Setup Automatic recording Scan parameters Depth curves C scan Processed channels Control bar Param Value Y pos 35 00 A 35 0077 X pos 2 70 40 0077 Y smo 70000 smol X sm l 2700 smol Raw smol LE AT Info bar eddyfi Acquisition Notepad Acquisition Notepad Functions performed from these bars will be explained in context throughout this documentation Most of the information given in the info bar also appears in the status
70. inspection with a rotating array probe section configure your basic scan parameters The Tube bore inspection with a rotating array probe section Tuberbore inspection with a rotating array probe Get position from Cire and arial encoders v Aboslute Encoders Encodertrigger Circumferential axis Axial asiz Ene Cire Ene Axial A Resolution check a Inthe Get position from drop down list select what device will provide probe positions The list of available devices depends on the selection made previously in the Sampling clock drop down list If you selected Internal clock or External clock from the Sampling clock list the following choices are available Circ and axial encoders Circumferential encoder Vertical Trigger And Axial Encoder Horizontal Trigger And Axial Encoder Acquisition clock If you selected a preset encoder in the Sampling clock list only the first three choices are available Circ and axial encoders Circumferential encoder Acquisition clock b Ifyou selected encoders from the Get position from drop down list check the Absolute Encoders box if necessary This option allows you to use negative and positive position values If you selected an encoder in step 5a select the appropriate encoder s for the circumferential and or axial axes in the Encoder trigger subsection In the Resolution check subsection define the resolution parameters that will be used during acquisitions The Resoluti
71. larger select Use large icons from the View menu see Figure 1 10 Changes will take effect the next time that you start Magnifi Rearranging Toolbars Toolbars can be moved anywhere on screen for the on going session To quickly place them back in the toolbar area in their default location select Arrange Toolbars from the View menu Figure 1 11 Selecting Arrange Toolbars Magnifi 3 3B1T6 Default setup le Settings Operation Layouts 4 Error List 7 zet 4 Show All Hide All U a Y Control Bar Info Bar v General Lv C scan Indication codes Analysis Acquisition Setup Acquisition Layout Acquisition Notepad Setup Wizard Use large icons Arrange Toolbars om i AN 5 Boks Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Managing Layouts Layouts are a very important part of effective acquisition and analysis tasks They allow you to view live or prerecorded data in a manner that is more efficient to you By organizing the various charts and graphical elements available in Magnifi in display elements called panes you can create the layout that will allow you to perform better Understanding Basic Layout Elements Maenifi offers several standard layout elements strip charts Lissajous voltage planes side views C scans regular and 3D and polar views regular and 3D These elements are presented in the following pages Managing Layouts 12 Strip Charts Figure 1 12 Strip chart
72. meaning that data is not saved anymore but still displayed on screen Click Stop or press F2 to stop the acquisition To start a new acquisition click Next from the Acquis tab of the Control bar or press F4 and start recording the next file in the list Repeat steps 8 to 5 until all your acquisitions are performed Data are saved automatically in the proper inspection project directories as explained on page 246 Displaying the Large Acquisition Window The oversized Start Acquisition window is very useful when acquisitions are performed by a single operator It allows you to see in a bigger font the name of the file that needs to be recorded It also gives you the option of moving automatically to the next file when the acquisition is stopped To work with this window 1 2 From the Operation menu select Large Acquisition Window Resize the window to your liking and position it wherever you want on the screen Everything in the window scales as you make the window larger or smaller Check the Move to next file after acquisition stop box if necessary Press F2 to start acquiring data Performing Acquisitions 252 Adding Notes Magnifi allows you to add various notes to your inspections You have the Acquisition Notepad where you can add notes to whole inspection project data files Comments where you can add a txt file to a specific acquisition file Bubble notes that can display comments visually on
73. name is indicated in the Resulting Channel Name box 4 To properly protect the probe specify the allowed minimum frequency and maximum amplitude in the Minimum frequency allowed and Maximum amplitude allowed text boxes of the Probe Protection group 5 To enable channel groups select the Cire check box in the Channel Groups group You can also assign prefixes to channel groups in the Prefix text box in the appropriate column 6 Type the frequency in kHz the amplitude in V and the phase in degrees that you need for the Circ group a To add frequencies click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups group This adds a new data line maximum of five under the first where you can also enter the proper frequency amplitude and phase Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups To configure DefHi single row topology bobbin parameters Figure 3 24 DefHi topology bobbin parameters Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders a Gai DefHiSingleRow T1 Topologies MEDEE eRe re pia DefHiSingleRow TI d Connector ECA Aray Bobbin Channel Groups v Present Absolute Differential Y v v Use Reference Coil Enabled Impedance Bridge Prefix ABS DIF 100 ohms Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg 100 8 00 i 0 0 Gain 45 dB Chanel prefix R_ Resulting Channel Name R_F800G1 1 To enable the bobbin portion of your DefHi probe
74. plane window 1 With a data file loaded select Automatic Measurements from the Operation menu or click Automatic Lissajous measurement from the Analysis toolbar This activates the indication management buttons Luu Figure 5 21 Active indication management buttons Lissajous left voltage plane right PARE FI UH SS CMI 1601 Indication pp mm vm Jman 0 DERI J management 2 66 Vpp 358 pp buttons Managing Reports 276 2 Click the indication selection arrow to display the type of entries available and select the indication that you want to enter in the report The selected indication appears in the button next to the arrow Figure 5 22 Available indications Lissajous left voltage plane right ooo we Lum Jman SO DEPT hi 66 Vpp 358 Pp gt CHP NDD DSI DTI LPI LCI MMI ey M Mil OBS SAl ii SCI HIA SYI W TBP BLG DNG DNT MBM 1401 ii i gt 0 BLGLY Lee LMR vm man gt 0 BLGLY p 75 OD 20 70 Vpp iosp PLP 3 Click the indication button to add that type of entry to the report The voltage angle and depth information displayed in the window are added to the report Figure 5 23 Clicking the indication button v pp 103 pp ext 329 7 ees Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 277 From the Report Window To add entries in a report from the Report window 1 With a data file l
75. screen for reporting purposes Bubble notes are covered in the next chapter see Analyzing amp Reporting Data on page 255 On the Acquisition Notepad Notes on the Acquisition Notepad apply to all files in the acquisition list Acquis tab These notes can be useful when something special happens at one point during a series of acquisitions 1 e when a probe equipment or operator is changed when there is noise coming from the environment etc and you want to make a note of it for the analyst who will work on the files afterwards The acquisition notepad is displayed as a toolbar under the Eddyfi logo To toggle the display of the Acquisition Notepad select Acquisition Notepad from the View menu To enter notes on the Acquisition Notepad 1 Click in the Acquisition Notepad A small Message Content window opens Figure 4 34 The Message Content window in the Acquisition Notepad gt yfi Acquisition Notepad Message Content z File Edt History Enter your note in the Message Content window Click the Close button The Message Content window closes and the message is now displayed in the Acquisition Notepad This note will be attached to all subsequently recorded files Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 253 Commenting on Specific Files Comments are txt files attached to a specific acquisition file in the acquisition list Acquis tab That text file is automatically given the same name
76. selected appears in the Data Processing window ready to use Setting Up Processed Channels 148 Adding Processing Units You can only add processing units inside a processing group Processing units correspond to mathematical actions performed on acquired signals To add processing units 1 Create or select an active group see Creating Groups on page 148 2 From this group click the Create a new unit button A menu drops down T from the button Figure 3 92 Creating a new unit al visa neke na bro pkt Copy to channel Derivate Detect Indication Detect landmark Event N Export to File FIR Filter Filter Median Filter 3 Select the Event processing unit this is the only event available for newly created groups It acts as a starting point for the signal processing sequence Once you have added this Event processing unit all other processing units become available 4 Add a second processing unit It appears literally on top of the Event unit Drag the new unit at an appropriate location within the group tab 5 Drag the handle from the Event unit to the newly added unit This symbolizes the logical link between the two units see Figure 3 93 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have created a complete signal processing sequence Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 149 Figure 3 93 Linking processing units d Data Processing gt sipo start
77. still be performed by pressing CTRL left click and drag 5 When you are done configuring the Lissajous display click OK Managing Views 50 Figure 1 59 Lissajous with measurement tools T_08 Rotation Rotation mark number a Red dot vo Measurement vector Null mark Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 51 Configuring Individual Lissajous View Parameters In Magnifi you can configure parameters that apply to all displayed Lissajous see page 48 or to each Lissajous individually To do so 1 Right click over a displayed Lissajous A contextual menu appears Figure 1 60 Lissajous contextual menu Measure Amplitude nn a Fhase x Best Fit Properties N 1691 0 PP MR vm Jman m L12 2 Select Properties The Properties window for this Lissajous appears In the Preview section you can see what will happen to the displayed data as you select to display elements and change colors Managing Views 52 Figure 1 61 Properties window for selected Lissajous Properties Display Preview L Grid Circle 1 Circle 2 Sepentine 500 pts Depth vs phase indicator W Red dot at cursor center Data type Colors d Channel C scan C scan ltem Background Cancel Color Use the global color g 3 In the Display section you can choose to display or hide Grid a square grid with accompanying voltage scale
78. the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Inthe Channels section of the General tab enter the full scale that you want to use in the Full channel scale box 440 III Figure 3 7 The Channels section Measurement convention a ASME EDF Channels Full channel scale 20 00 Y p p De Hide Raw channel Precision 3 To hide the raw unprocessed channels check the Hide Raw channel box 4 Click OK The Preferences window closes and the channel scale that you defined will be used throughout Magnifi Setting General Application Preferences 78 Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information For each channel and C scan you can choose to assign and or display certain information namely an index and or coil number a frequency and a label To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Click Channel Display in the lower right corner of the General tab The Display and navigation window opens Figure 3 8 The Display and navigation window Display and navigation Channel C Scan Displayable Index Coil Frequency tical Ej Coil z zi E zi z z E ol E 3 On the Channel tab you can assign an index and or coil number a frequency and a label to each available channel 4 On the C scan tab you can assign the same information to each available C scan 5 To assign a si
79. the Median Filter dialog box opens Setting Up Processed Channels 152 Figure 3 96 Configuring the Median Filter processing unit Median Filter T Low pass i High pass Window size odd number 13 Cancel 2 Select whether you want to apply a low pass or high pass filter 3 Enter the number of samples that should constitute the window The number of samples must be an odd number 4 Click OK The Median Filter dialog box disappears and the Median Filter processing unit is configured Editing the Mix Processing Unit r The Mix processing unit which is mostly used for tube inspections allows you to pje remove unwanted signals noise by subtracting one signal Channel 2 from another Channel 1 It can also be used effectively with array probes in specific a circumstances To configure the Mix processing unit 1 Double click the processing unit icon the Mix dialog box opens Figure 3 97 Configuring the Mix processing unit Kia Chane 1 Chand Geni Gent Ronin i Ramia fy Referee SUPA F Relirimert APAT X n R DRD A DrD er OJS 69 4655 PA r t R Dri R D0 0 5451 020A 76 4364 113 5514 ange itaet Enge one Pent Murderer nf come Fic agri Mumba of oe Tiers a4 2 3 a4 add Add Remove ad Hemor l om Cancel ox Carer hiiit Geer Rear 2 Inthe Reference drop down list either select an existing reference created in the Calibration Points dialog box see page 209 or enter the na
80. the circling blue arrow button The firmware is updated and the Ectane reboots automatically Click OK in the window that appears Your Ectane firmware has been fixed Note It is possible that the firmware contained in your version of Magnifi is not the latest to go with your instrument This should not prevent the Ectane from appearing in the Instrument Connection window but it could cause instability problems when using the instrument To make sure that you have the proper firmware click Details in the Instrument Connection window In the Details window that appears make sure that the numbers indicated under Firmware and FPGA are identical to the ones indicated in your calibration certificate If they are not call Eddyfi Figure 6 5 The Details window Details Device Type be Eetane Model IpAddress ke 127 001 MacAddress fe BC 92 33 00 F F FF J Subnet Mask Fixing Corrupted Ectane Firmware 294 Configuring Ectane for DHCP Protocol One of the advantages of the Ectane is the use of the DHCP addressing scheme To change the Ectane addressing scheme 1 Launch Magnifi 2 Click Connect to an instrument or select Connect to Instrument from the Operation menu The Instrument Connection window appears Figure 6 6 The Instrument Connection window Connection Ectane Type Model MAC Address Ectane 256 EC 92 33 00 FF FF 3 Click in the Config column The Instrument C
81. the end of the list with the name New Probe Model highlighted Enter a name for the new probe model and press the TAB key The Geometry column is highlighted Select whether the new probe model is for tube Tube from ID or surface Surface inspection and press the TAB key If you selected Surface the Technique column turns grey because the only technique supported right now is ECT If you selected Tube from ID you can select one of four techniques ECT RFT NFT MFL Once you are done defining your probe model click OK The window closes and the new model will be available in the Probe Wizard Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 197 Managing Indication Codes Indication codes appear in the Code pane as well as in C scans They are generally abbreviations destined to highlight specific indications found during an inspection Adding Indication Codes To add indication codes 1 On the Settings menu click Indication Codes The Indications Codes window appears By default indication code DF 1 and DF2 already exist Figure 3 141 The Indications Codes window 72 gt 38 Indication Codes Code Description Type Automatic Comment Color Del DE Defect K Import Export At least one code must have the type No indication for the No defect detected OK button to be available in the toolbar Cancel Click Add By default a CODE1 code appears It is editable Ent
82. the list with all appropriate modifications already applied This modified probe can be deleted and modified as necessary contrary to official Eddyfi probes Updating the Probe Database Note Eddyfi may occasionally update its official probe database We recommend that you update the database when such updates are available To do so 1 From the Probe Manager click Update The Select a New Local Probe Database window opens 2 Browse locate and select the xml file sent to you by Eddyfi 3 Click Open The xml file is opened immediately replacing the official probe database in the process Changes made to probe definitions are carried over during probe database updates You can always return to a probe s original definition when you want to discard your changes Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 195 Exporting Probe Database Magnifi allows you to export your database of user probes for use on another computer for example There is no need to export the official database since it 1s already present with every license of Magnifi To export your database of user probes 1 From the Probe Manager window click Export The Select a User Probe Database Export Location window opens 2 Browse to the location where you want to save the export file Gn xml format 3 Click Save The user probe database is saved in the selected location Importing Probe Database Magnifi allows you to import a d
83. the top of the window The sorting depends on the side of the indication To have a valid curve the sorting should provide an increasing phase or amplitude value once the calibration has been performed If the phase or amplitude value measured during calibration is decreasing the curve will be invalid You can change the sorting by checking the Reverse order box 9 Click Finish Your sizing curve is defined Calibrating the System and Verifying Curves Note Once you have configured your curves you have to calibrate your system and verify the resulting curves For more information on calibrating the system see Calibrating Systems on page 238 Once your system has been calibrated 1 Select Sizing curves from the Control Bar The Sizing Curves Configuration window appears 2 Under Definitions select the curve name that you want to review and click the Curve tab A valid curve should appear If the word INVALID still appears at least one calibration point was not measured properly during the calibration or the order of the indication codes is incorrect Click Select and manually correct the invalid calibration points in the Select Calibration Point window that appears see Figure 8 151 Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 209 Managing Calibration Points Calibration points are predetermined reference points used to calibrate channels and C scans and to build sizing curves They are usually manag
84. used to display C scans in a data pane Figure 3 45 The C scan subsection C scan Circumferential axis Anal axis From 0 deg 0 0000 iim Size 360 deg 6000 0000 nin Display resolution 2 0000 deg smpl 0 5000 mmsmpl Min display resolution 4 5000 deg smpl W Automatic axial display resolution 0k Cancel a Inthe Display resolution field under the Circumferential axis column enter the angle variation required between samples b Inthe From field under the Axial axis column enter the starting point for the C scan display based on the size of the piece under test c Inthe Size field under the Axial axis column enter the end point for the C scan display based on the size of the piece under test Normally the value entered in this field is the total size of the piece under test d By default the display resolution on the axial axis is calculated automatically If you want to enter a specific display resolution for this axis uncheck the Automatic axial display resolution box This activates the Display resolution field under the Axial axis column Enter the required resolution in that field 9 Click OK when you are done setting up your scan parameters Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to the Magnifi application Click Cancel to discard all the modifications that you made Note Fora typical example on how to set for an IRIS inspection look carefully at Figure 38 40 Configuring Scan
85. vertical component from the imaginary zero level line to the main cursor position to measure amplitude Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 3 Figure 3 5 important Absolute Peak uses a straight line from the zero position to the peak value of the data selection to measure amplitude Absolute Peak Horizontal uses only the horizontal component from the imaginary zero position to the peak value of the data selection to measure amplitude Absolute Peak Vertical uses only the vertical component from the imaginary zero position to the peak value of the data selection to measure amplitude Select the default phase measurement method The Default measurement method section phase il fal Default measurement method Amplitude Peak to peak x Phase Peak to peak Peak to peak Maximum rate Peak to peak first transition X Enable login window Peak to peak measures the phase using the two points that are furthest apart in the Lissajous Maximum rate measures the phase using two points on the steepest section of the Lissajous Peak to peak first transition measures the phase using the two points that are furthest apart on the first transition in the Lissajous This method is particularly useful to measure absolute signal because the starting point of the measurement vector remains on the signal baseline Click OK The Preferences window closes and the
86. you can create your own To create a custom color scheme 1 From the Current scheme drop down list select Custom Figure 1 50 Selecting the Custom color scheme Views color scheme Current scheme White Background SORE ee eter ee ereeeereeey ie i 2 Click the button next to the item that you want to customize Two tabs appear where you can select colors the Palette and the System tabs see Figure 1 51 Managing Views 42 Figure 1 51 Custom color tabs F pwm B Predeoprcey be eee y Goreme Diy Arata chew ujera ep cet chee Goon Ef E r re me ipis tO T chor wh chanel ir Tar Fis 5 5 iay g MEE ETE r ai m A Sel EEE Ny Pail rai Tae EEE k Baiar ia SEER SEa8 PENY HLTA eke BEEBE EERE iba BEE SEeEeeae perg rrr ee ES eee S eee S ee ne erTrreritet k Sort rte boa hr z tora bor peeks LEP alu aa t LIF Cancel 3 Click the color that you want When you release the mouse button the color that you clicked replaces the previous color 4 Repeat step 3 for all the items that you want to customize 5 When you are finished customizing your color scheme click OK The Preferences dialog box closes and your custom color scheme is applied Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Assigning a View to a Pane Magnifi offers you the following views to assign to any pane 43 gt gt gt HF
87. 0 The Edit Inspection Information window Important P a Edit Inspection Information Name Report Name InspectionName Setup Save as Inspection setup in Project folder List format Row Column Enter the inspection name in the Name text box Enter the report name in the Report Name text box In the Setup drop down list select how you want to manage the inspection setup file Save as Inspection Setup in Project Folder default value copy and rename the current setup and saves it under the Setup directory When you use this option you must already have the appropriate setup loaded in Magnifi Keep current name and location performs no action on the setup file The current name is kept and the file is not copied in the Setup directory This is the option to use if you prepare in advance several inspections and the current Magnifi setup is not necessarily the one to be used for this inspection In the List format drop down list select the list format that you want to use Row Column Zone Row Column Free format Import This last option allows you to select a st file using the Browse button This file will be copied in the Data folder of the inspection project directory and renamed List st Its name and location will be displayed in the text box underneath the List format drop down list Click OK The inspection is loaded with the proper setup tube list format and
88. 26 DefHi topology bobbin parameters Instrument Configuration Wizard DefHiDoubleRow T1 Parameters for the selected topology Connector ECA Array Bobbin Channel Groups v Present Absolute Differential Use Reference Coil Enabled 7 7 Impedance Bridge Prefix ABS DIF Lau chs Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg CR Sa 8 00 0 0 Gain 23 dB Chanel prefix R_ Resulting Channel Name R_F1G1 Ad Cancel lt lt Back Nex Finish 1 To enable the bobbin portion of your DefHi probe select the Present check box 2 If your DefHi probe contains reference coils select the Use reference coils check box 3 On the Impedance Bridge group s list select the appropriate bridge impedance 4 In the Gain text box type an appropriate value 5 In the Channel prefix text box type a channel prefix The resulting channel name is displayed in the Resulting Channel Name box 6 To enable channel groups select the Absolute and or Differential check box in the Channel Groups group You can also assign prefixes to these channel groups in the Prefix box in the appropriate column 7 Specify the frequency in kHz the amplitude in V and the phase in degrees for each necessary group of channels a To add frequencies click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups group This adds a new data line maximum of five under the first where you can also enter an appropriate frequency amplitude an
89. 3 a 0 086 T 1282s A T S2ms Y Love TS2 6094 9 mom c iy 22 Calibrating Systems 244 Calibrating IRIS IRIS calibration is important to ensure that the calibration tube dimensions internal and external diameters wall thickness are measured correctly To do so 1 Load an existing setup for more information see Opening Inspection Projects on page 246 2 Acquire data from the calibration tube 3 Move the C scan data selection cursor on a sound region of the tube which represents the nominal condition 4 Select Operation gt System Calibration or click System calibration from i the General toolbar The Calibration window appears pp Figure 4 27 The Calibration window f amp Calibration Channel Channel and Sizing Curves Sizing Curves C scan C scan and Sizing Curves IRIS Landmark ProbeDelay WallThickness 5 Select IRIS 6 Select ProbeDelay and click the measurement button Once the reference 2 measurement is taken a green check mark appears next to the reference name n in the list This measurement will evaluate the internal diameter around the circumference at the cursor location and recalculate the probe delay so that the average internal diameter matches the nominal internal diameter defined in the Application Wizard 7 Select WallThickness and click the measurement button Once the reference Z measurement is taken a green check mark appears next to the reference name i
90. 800 If your current setup is for the Ectane Magnifi only searches for an Ectane To load a default TC7700 setup on the File menu point to New and thenclick TC7700 Setup 5 Select the available instrument and then click Connect Figure G 3 Selecting an instrument ro a Instrument Connection Ectane Bo MAC Address Status Config Details Establishing Communication with Magnifi 314 Creating a Setup for the Test Unit Magnifi can create setup files for legacy test units TC7700 and MS5800 use the same setup files To do so 1 On the File menu point to New and then click TC7700 Setup A dialog box appears to inform you that the setup in use was modified and whether you want to save it Figure G 4 Creating a new legacy unit setup file m Magnifi 3 3B1T6 Default setup View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help New Ectane Setup Load Setup j f Sawe Setup Ctri IRIS Setup p Save Setup s Ctrl Shift Save Setup and Edit Properties View Setup Properties Load Data el Save Data As Hh Create Inspection Project Manage Inspection Project Recent Files p Exit Alt F4 2 To save the current setup click Yes Otherwise click No For more information about saving setups see Saving Setups on page 212 Note Once the new setup file is created a new toolbar appears and the elements of the Settings gt Acquisition Setup menu cha
91. 901 4C13 8698 9812B658085D Currently detected Company Licensee License type Expiration Import license 3 Click Import license A standard Open window appears 4 Browse to the location of the license file in txt format select it and click Open The license key information appears in the Currently detected fields of the Software section Your software key is upgraded Appendix B Operating 167700 amp MS5800 312 Installing Software for the TG7700 and MS5800 Magnifi comes with a separate installer for all the software necessary to establish communication and ensure compatibility with TC7700 and MS5800 test units For the sake of brevity we will call these test units legacy in the following pages To install this software 1 On the installer disk that came with Magnifi browse and find the MS5800 and TC7700 support for Magnifi 8 3 exe file 2 Double click the file 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation For details about how to properly use the Bootp software to establish the first line of communication between your workstation and the test unit refer to the Zetec Bootp technical documentation Figure C 1 The Zetec Bootp Service Configuration window j Zetec Bootp Service Configuration Instrument Connection Instrument Configurations Request Log Active instruments Diagnostic FTP
92. AM MM kH TIFAO ROLIT kH TIF amp 0A25 BOO 000 kHz TIFE 00 000 kHz TIFT BOO 000 kHz TIFSO0428 BOO 000 kHz TIFO BOO 000 kHz TIFS00430 BOO 000 kHz TIFANI BOO 000 kHz TF ere BUMO KH2 2 From this window you can filter by which category you want to view the setup information Channels Frequencies Topologies Note Information in this window is always the same Selecting a layout on the left only organizes the information differently based on what you want to see When you are done browsing the setup information click Close Browsing Ectane Setup Information 142 Setting Up Processed Channels Magnifi offers extremely powerful signal processing capabilities These capabilities known as processed channels are in fact a simple visual programming language aimed specifically at signal processing By visually grouping and configuring events processes and linking them in a specific order you can easily apply very complex processing on signals acquired with Ectane instruments The following pages explain this programming language Only the most important events are covered Once you understand the basic principles of processed channels you can freely explore the remaining events and learn more at your own pace All processed channels are configured from the Data Processing window To access this window double click Processed channels on the Setup tab Figure 3 85 Accessing the Data Processin
93. Absolute Encoders Encoderstigger Circumferential axis Axial axis Resolution check Tube ID 20 0000 mm Circumferential axis Axial anis Minimum density 1 0000 empl rare 1 0000 empil rnr Speedrotation 50 0000 Ips 50 0000 mms Acquisition density 1 2Fs2 empl mm 1 0000 ampl mm Acquisition resolution 0 854 mmismpl 71 0000 ror srripl Maximum probe speed 63 6620 Ips 0 0000 mm s C scan Circumferential axis Axial axis From 0 deg 0 0000 mm Size 360 deg 6000 0000 ita Display resolution 2 0000 deg smpl 1 0000 mm smpl Min display resolution 4 5000 deg smpl Automatic axial display resolution aa ox Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 119 2 Inthe Scan type section select Rotating array probe under Tube bore When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Parameters window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan 3 In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder For more information on defining encoders see page 82 Figure 3 53 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Acquisition rate Sampling clack Internal clack r Requested 4000 0000 Hz Actual 4000 Hz a From the Sampling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate is controlled by an internal clock an external clock or a preset encoder b Ifyou chose Internal clock enter the acquisition ra
94. Application Preferences 74 Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Methods Magnifi allows you to set a default amplitude and or phase measurement method for the entire application To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 From the Default measurement method section of the General tab select a default amplitude measurement method Figure 3 4 The Default measurement method section amplitude Default measurement method Amplitude Peak to peak Phase Peak to peak ry Vertical Peak to peak first transition Horizontal B Absolute Horizontal Absolute Vertical Absolute Peak ii Enable login Peak to peak uses the combination of the vertical and horizontal component to measure the maximum amplitude Horizontal uses only the horizontal component to measure the amplitude Vertical uses only the vertical component to measure the amplitude Peak to peak first transition uses the combination of the vertical and horizontal component of the first transition of the signal to measure maximum amplitude Absolute uses a straight line from the zero position to the main cursor position to measure amplitude Absolute Horizontal uses only the horizontal component from the imaginary zero level line to the main cursor position to measure amplitude Absolute Vertical uses only the
95. CA Encircling Pp 35 0 0 382 212 tetjung Circ 0 0000 ECA Encircling PP 35 0 0 12 23 35 test jung Ciee 0 0000 ECA Encireling PP 103 0 0 426 2 test jung Cec 0 0000 ECA Encurchnng PP VPP 4 5000 Insert inset Coy Dolte Dolto A Ed Sot Print Options Dnon Header 3 Select Edit multiple entries and then the value that you want to edit from Figure 5 32 4 the sub menu that appears the values available in the sub menu are the columns displayed in the Report window or report status The New value to apply to selected row window opens Entering a value for multiple rows New value to apply to selected row Enter the new value for field PosYLmkOffset Enter either type or select from a drop down list depending on the type of value to change the value that you want to apply to all selected rows 5 Click OK The value entered is applied to all selected rows Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 283 Viewing Data from a Report Entry Magnifi allows you to display the specific data on which a report entry is based To do so 1 Open the Report window 2 Double click the index number of the defect whose data you want to view The file containing the selected defect is automatically loaded and the cursors are positioned at the defect location Sorting Report Entries You can sort the report entries if necessary From the Report window click Sort The report entries are sor
96. Channel C scan X C scan Y Calibrated using measurement Peak to Peak Parameters Input measurement Phase Shape Best Fit Dual Slope Setting Up Sizing Curves 203 204 To configure channel information for your sizing curves 1 Select the unit of work to use on the Units list The selected unit applies to the Size column in the Calibration Points step of the wizard The Units list allows you to select an absolute e g mm or relative e g Percentage unit of measurement This gives you the amount of matter removed from the tube Note Jf you want to know the amount of remaining matter select the Report as remaining wall check box 2 3 In the Measure from group select the channel used for measurement In the Calibrated using measurement list select the appropriate calibration measurement technique varies according to the input measurement phase or amplitude Absolute Absolute Horizontal Absolute Peak Absolute Peak Horizontal Absolute Peak Vertical Absolute Vertical Horizontal Maximum Rate Peak to Peak Peak to Peak First Transition Vertical gt gt gt gt US o Note For absolute channels we recommend that you use Peak to Peak First Transition instead of Peak to Peak 4 In the Parameters subsection select the shape of the sizing curve that you want to create the Input measurement is already selected from a previous step in the wizard Best
97. Click in the Config column The Instrument Configuration window appears Figure 6 9 The Instrument Configuration window Inctrument Configuration Hetwrurk indormation Embedded Sollware Updale Mode Srstic IP Address m Use the embedded sothvare thal comes with Magnih IPaddrese 157 188 100 1 Use cushan embedded selbvare Subnet Mask 255 255 255p Gateway o00 0 Z 4 In the Network Information section select Static IP Address from the Mode drop down list This activates all fields in the section 5 Enter an IP address in the range recognized by your network card and click the downward pointing green arrow It is now possible to use older instruments while still using the Ectane Configuring Ectane for Static IP Addresses 296 Chapter 6 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Reinstalling Magnifi 298 Reinstalling the Software To reinstall Magnifi simply follow the instructions from the Installation Wizard Note When installation is complete Windows 7 Program Compatibility Assistant might require that you confirm that Magnifi installed correctly see page 301 Simply click This program installed correctly Figure A 1 Launching the Setup wizard BA Magnifi 3 083 Setup Welcome to Magnifi 3 0B3 Setup Welcome to the Wizard for Magnifi 3 083 Setup QJ Collecting information Preparing installation The Setup Wizard will install Magnifi 3 083 on your computer Please dick Next to Installing
98. Custom Turtine Model Eddy 12mm Transducer Frequency 16 pee 1 Inthe Tube Nominal Measurements section enter the tube outside diameter in the Outside Diameter text box and the tube wall thickness in the Wall Thickness text box 2 Inthe Ultrasound Velocities section select the material in which the ultrasound waves will be propagated You can select either a standard material Generic Material or a new material Custom Material a If you selected a generic material the drop down list under the Name column becomes active and you can select one of the listed materials The remaining fields are automatically completed b If you selected a custom material enter the name of the material in the Name column text box and the velocity of sound in it in the Velocity text box c You also have the velocity of sound in water which you can change if necessary if the water used has been modified in some way which would have changed its behavior in relation to how sound travels in it Click Default to return the default water velocity value 3 In the Equipment section select the turbine used in the Turbine Model drop down list 4 In the same section select the transducer frequency in the Transducer Frequency drop down list 5 Click Finish to finish your IRIS configuration Configuring Ectane IRIS Acquisition Setups 104 Configuring Scan Parameters When preparing an acquisition setup the scan parameters to set depend on t
99. Enabling Disabling Channels sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 139 Browsing Ectane Setup Information ssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 141 Setting Up Processed Channels sssssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 142 Creating GROUPS sassen ienn aea e a Eai 143 peletind Grou S zone nanii EA AAEE A 144 PUIG UNI AOU S cs haste Sesto E r taerar arse ncaa ates ieee ate terse ties des 144 Renaming CI OULD zee ces Sate A tec anata ast an te ie otal ae a lac alae 144 ACtivating Deactivating Groups ccccccccccssscccsssrececsereeecsseesesseeeeecatesecsateseeatesessatesesaneeens 145 SAVING GNOUDS pscccnarincstaactnaresancnausuaeunancencnawsusanvnassnay aT 146 PG VGN VCD AOD Set cis ct State tree ie Sissies Seite soa eee neal cre ated ee rer ance toners ees verte 147 PACING FOG ESS ING UIE esias etc atc ea ate ae aC I ce 148 Deleting Processing UNIS c ccsesscssersesscsersssscssersesscserscsssesseesesseeseesesseesersecseseuseceensensensenss 149 EGITING PROCESSING UNIS ses 555 ecsisd eds ces aie diiuavteciennnialelaeuhde etaakeiei eel eeieaaaetaaeed aed 149 Duplicating Processing UNIts cccccssssccssssseeeesssseeeeeesseteceesseeeseesssaeeessesateeessssaeeesesseaes 160 Renaming Processing UNITS oana an cadet pe aaa actos wile eee eee ina ase eae aaa 161 MANAGING G SCANS isinru aa deena eit a
100. Fit Dual linear for phase measurement only an ECT curve with two linear segments representing ID and OD or Near and Far side calibration points in relationship with phase Best Fit Dual Slope for phase measurement only an ECT curve with two segments representing ID and OD or Near and Far side calibration points relationship with phase The OD side of the curve will need at least three points including the hole in order to trace a polynomial curve Best Fit Linear for phase and amplitude measurements best linear interpolation within the measured calibration points Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 205 Best Fit Polynomial for phase and amplitude measurements best polynomial degree 2 interpolation within the measured at least three calibration points Connected Points for phase and amplitude measurements simple point to point curve 5 If you are working with RFT technology and absolute channels in combination with voltage planes there is one more section to configure Extrapolated Curve In this section you give a name ID and description to your RFT extrapolated curves and select whether to use them or not The extrapolation can be used to evaluate the depth of long and taper defects from a curve made of short defects Figure 3 148 Channel parameter definitions for calibration points RFT technology IL Sizing Curves Configuration Short groove S RFT S
101. GRO ee Trea Filer 78 Meg Performing IRIS specific Tasks 236 Adjusting the Back Wall Gate To adjust the back wall gate 1 Click Backwall in the header of the A scan see Elements of an A scan on page 23 The first echo on the left side of the A scan represents the front wall echo and the second echo on the right side represents the back wall echo 2 Change the TGC slope to increase or decrease the amplitude of the back wall echo When possible try to have an average amplitude on the back wall that is about 75 of the screen height The TGC slope can be modified directly on the A scan by moving the handles on the yellow line You can also type a value in the TGC Slope field located in the Gate tab see Elements of an A scan on page 23 3 With the mouse adjust the levels of the blue gate Try to set the level as low as possible to detect small indication without triggering on the noise 4 Adjust the beginning of the gate as close as possible to the front wall echo without including it 5 Once the gate is well set the wall thickness of the tube should be well displayed in the projection view Figure 4 19 Adjusting the back wall gate Lu Megnifi 5 28279 owusers ngrenser gqtecdocumendsimagniffcetupiirs demomeageetup file View Settings Gperstion Layouts Special Help in t E eop wl OB T Gf Ge EF ojze 00 0 GS ae 2 Seer waiye S WT 2 65 men URIS Dirk riata FA tueg peering
102. ION COGS sorer E aac yeaa eda asic waco see ce etenccanecaees 198 Removing Indication COdES cccscccsssesessssesesseesessuseseseusesecuseeseuensusauensuscuensusauseusauensusauens 199 EXPOMNG INGIGAUOM GOGES iieii 199 Setting Up SIZING GUEVES catered anaana aaan aaa aa aana aaa aaa aaa 200 Configuring General Sizing Curve Parameters ccccccccssccesssseeeessreeesseeeeesseeeeeseeteseeseneeens 200 Configuring Calibration Points for SIZING Curves cccccceseesssseeeessseeeesseteeeesseteesetesesaterens 202 Configuring Individual Sizing Curves cccccccssseessssseeesseeeecseeeeecseteseesetesessatesessateseeateeens 203 Calibrating the System and Verifying Curves ccccccccesscecssseesesseeeeesseretessetesesetesesatesens 208 Managing Calibration Points ccsssssssscccsssssssecccscnsseeeccecsnnsseeccensseseeeunesssseeeuenssssseeenenaes 209 Managing Remote Controls cccsssssssscccssssseseccncnnsseecenncsnsseecenensseseecuensnsseeeennnssssseeesenss 210 Saving SOUNDS cai cik ic da siicecasase sak cadence tncviacnasei acon autadinseebucansuadaauddsadaiwewtassansueecauuatneuetecbacasans 212 Saving a Setup under a Different NAME ccceccsssssecsesseeesesseeeesseeeeessereeeesetesessetesesatesens 212 Creating Inspection Projects sssssecccsssssseecccscsseseecenccsseeeccencnsseeeceusenseescennnsssssecennnssees 214 Performing Acquisitions Cee 21 7 Setting up the Ectane sssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
103. Make sure that your Ectane is the Ectane configured for DHCP protocol see Configuring Ectane for DHCP Protocol on page 294 The Ectane does not appear in Corrupted firmware Try and boot from the spare firmware the Magnifi connection window to reprogram the Ectane see Fixing Corrupted Ectane Firmware on page 292 Defective or unplugged network Change network cable and make sure cable that the two network LEDs connections and 100 Mbits light up please refer to your Ectane documentation for LED location Internal defect on the Ectane Call Eddyfi Incompatible IP addresses Make sure that the network card IP addressing scheme is identical to the Ectane s i e both in DHCP or both in fixed IP address See Configuring Ectane for Static IP Addresses on The Ectane appears in the page 295 Magnifi connection window but a red X is displayed inthe Status Ectane firmware outdated Update Ectane firmware see column Upgrading the Ectane Firmware on page 290 Windows places the network Forcefully renew the card s IP address card in power saving mode with the ipconfig renew command Chapter 6 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Table 6 1 Problems Possible Causes Solutions continued 289 One of the network LEDs does not light up The Ectane is not charging batteries charge indicator Balancing operation failed Quick Troubleshooting Guide Defective or unpl
104. Name Example R_COIL1 F1 Driver 2 oa rine Phase deg 0 0 0 Cancel lt lt Back From the Connector drop down list select the Ectane connector that will be used 4 pin 19 pin 19 pin MFL or 41 pin In the Channels subsection type a prefix in the Channel Prefix column The resulting channel name is displayed in the Resulting Channel Name Example box underneath the Connector drop down list Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 4 In the Gain column enter the gain that you need The proper value range depends on the selected connector 41 pin and 4 pin connectors 23dB 58dB 19 pin 36dB 86dB 19 pin MFL 18dB 538dB 5 In the Enable column check the boxes next to the channels that you want to enable Depending on the chosen connector certain channels will already be disabled If you chose 4 pin only inputs 5 and 6 will be available 41 pin all inputs will be available 19 pin standard or MFL inputs 1 to 4 will be available 6 By default only one frequency is available in the Frequencies subsection except if the 19 pin MFL connector is selected see below There are certain limitations pertaining to the Frequencies subsection The total amplitude for all frequencies cannot be more than 10V There cannot be more than five frequencies in use per timeslot There cannot be more timeslots than frequencies used When the 19 pin conne
105. OIDATS na ea E O E E A ee E 10 MANAGING Layouts sisisi aaa leaded aa aaa a aa aaa a NAE 11 Understanding Basic Layout Elements cccccccsssssreceessseeeeessseeeeeeesaeeeesseeeeeesssateeeesseaes 11 Dependent vs Independent PANES cccccccesssceceessseeeeessseeeeeeesseeeeeesssaeeeeessssateeeesssateeeenseaes 30 Creating Ech 0 8 6c anne a AR 31 CUSTOMIZING HAV OULS annann dod tha tat a het a mde atid a ot an tn me tact 34 Specifying a Default Layout irori ea a 38 Removing Layouts from the List ccccccccsssccessseeecsseeeeseseeeeeseeeeeseeeseesetesesutesecutesesatesens 39 Managing VIEWS sicaris a 40 Configuring Views Colors ccccccscsecssscsussscesssseusessunsuseueuseseueuseseuensevcueuseveueuseveneuseveneusevennnenes 40 Assigning a View to a Pane cecesecceessseeeesssseteeecssseeeeeceesaeeeteesaeeeseesasteseesasteeeessateeeenseaes 43 Configuring General Strip Chart Parameters ccccccesccssssseccssseeeecsreesesereeeeseeeeesseteeessatesens 44 Configuring Individual Strip Chart Parameters ccccccccsssssscccssecesssreessseeeesssetesessetesessetesens 46 Configuring General Lissajous View Parameters cccceccccsssseessseeeessereessereeessetetesetereees 48 Configuring Individual Lissajous View Parameters cccccscccccsssecscssreesesseeseeseteseeseteeesseteeens 51 Configuring Voltage Plane Views cccsccssssscecssereeessseeeesseteeesseeeeeseteseeseeeessutesesetesssatese
106. Processing Type Details CF2 CF3 Delete CF4 Build from channel Rename Scale Axial Duplicate 2 ae Y Import Interpolation Circ 2 pts Export 2 In the C scan list on the left select the C scan to rename and click Rename The C scan Name window appears with the previous name appearing in the text box Figure 3 117 Renaming a C scan C Scan Name 3 Enter the new name in the text box and click OK The C scan Name window disappears and you return to the C scan Configuration window where the C scan now appears under its new name Managing C scans 174 Importing C scans To import C scans 1 Select C scans from the Settings menu or double click C scan in the Setup tab The C scan Configuration window appears Figure 3 118 The C scan Configuration window Process State Processing Type Details Add Delete Delete Rename Edit Duplicate 2 Click Import A standard Open dialog box appears Figure 3 119 Importing a C scan a Or i x Qrganize New older a m Prchanes A H Videos Documents library n Arrange by Folder T Inthades 2 bocetions ae aji Computer Hame Date modifird Type oc Lk Blocs notes OneNote File folder af Development srede A iFa 2011 02 07 0934 File Foleles Cpt Softee Team rvd di Face 2011 02 28 0634 File folder D ApplcationTeam is UL Fertuers Gutlook i Fle firldes he Rhech
107. Scan Parameters window for 2D surface scans with single pass array probes Scan type Acquisition rate Linear single axis scan bobbin Sampling clack Internal clack Tube bore Requested 800 0000 Hz Ci Rotating probe CHEMIE Actual agg Hz O Rotating aray probe 20 surface scan z C scan orientation D Single channel raster scan Single pass array probe eT i i Array probe raster scan Polar array scar D Polar raster scan Single pass scan surface inspection array probe Scan direction maig ase Y axis Encoder tigger Freoder t Freoder r Probe part speed 138 8889 0 0000 Acquisition resolution 0 1736 mmsmpl Acquisition density p r604 smpl mm C scan ans Y anis From 0 0000 mm 0 0000 mm Size 2000 0000 mm 1000 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 5000 mm smpl 0 5000 mmsmpl Configuring Scan Parameters 126 2 Figure 3 64 In the Scan type section select Single pass array probe under 2D surface scan When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Parameters window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder For more information on defining encoders see page 82 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Acquisition rate Sampling clack lnternal clack T Requested 800 0000 Hz Actual agi Hz a From the Sa
108. T probes 4 Enter the bandwidth of every channel in the Channel bandwidth field 5 Enter the time required by the multiplexer to stabilize its signal per timeslot in the Mux time action field 6 Enter the percentage allowed of frequency variation in the Eddy current frequency tolerance field 7 In the Topologies subsection select the appropriate probe configuration Conventional Probe default Impedance Double Driver Short Double Driver Orthogonal Single Driver DefHi Single Row DefHi Double Row Custom gt The first topology is for conventional probe connections 4 pins 19 pins and 41 pins All other topologies are for eddy current array probes with the SmartMUX 160 pin connector 8 Click Next to move to the next configuration step Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups Configuring Probe Topologies The last step offered by the configuration wizard is the configuration of the probe topology The parameters to configure depend on the topology chosen in the previous step Configuring Conventional Topologies To configure conventional topologies Figure 3 17 Conventional topology parameters rc Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders General El Topologies Conventional Probe T1 Conventional Probe T1 Parameters for the selected topology Channel Prefix R COIL1 Connector 41 pins Resulting Channel
109. a type section The data gathered and its associated results appear in the table on the right Appendix C 317 Defining Generator Parameters As its name implies the Generator tab of the Channels dialog box manages all the EC generator board parameters see Figure C 7 Figure G 7 The TC7700 MS5800 Channels dialog box Generator tab Channels heal Global Generator Raw Channels Outpt o Display Fill tool Probe protection 1 MS5800 ECT 1 x Amplitude Requested Min frequency allowed Fill selected time slots with ov 0 kHz Phase Actual Ms Max amplitude allowed Frequency kHz Amplitude V 0 00 TS1 Ts2 Frequency tolerance Activate Tolerance 3 000000 Fi 00 0 F2 48 000 0 F3 5 5 5 5 F3 24 000 0 Fa 6 000 0 Optimize To configure the parameters 1 On the Output list select the generator output that you want to display or modify You can only configure one generator at a time You can have no more than four generators per generator board and a maximum of two boards per test unit For the MS5800 generator outputs 1 and 2 are dedicated to ECT and generator outputs 3 and 4 are dedicated to RFT 2 On the Use list assign a use to the output that you selected above To enable the generator board select Normal To balance an absolute impedance probe in a setup using an internal balancing source select Balancing Unused outputs must be Off 3 Int
110. aaa aaa a 162 Creando G2SGANS Soniirniinii eaa a a a i 162 Eding G Scan ProCOSSOS ais cctrcndtashicedtesbnaydteadtsedtardnaedhesdhesdtasaherdhesdieratardhesdes nasties erib 164 Deleting C scan Processes erien A E K A ac a a a ee 171 Ordering C SCAN Processes scccccsscsescssssesesseeususeuersuseueusuneueususeueueuseueususeueususeneueusenensusenens 171 Deleting G SCANS eaa a 171 Duplicating GS CGMS ossiani rr a a 172 Renaming sy 025 j cane en ane E ATEO oC eee 173 Mponda SCANS waza nccuracesnns cates nnevesten a avevintes a a N 174 EXDOMING G SCANS iirinn suasinavcnanaausnanahan cease A Aa 175 Configuring C SCAN VIEWS ccecccccessscecsseeeessseteecesetececateeeesetasseseeesecatesessaeeesatesessuteeeseatess 176 Changing G scan Palettes in Use ccccssccssssssesssssesssseuesssseuerssseuensesneneususeeususenensusenensusenens 178 Registering PROCESSING asier e E N NL E 179 Managing Landmarks wise desiceacccteced ccdectivecectna cus vedeakacdececanstsa ectasddnntancdussaseecctasdnenes escsuens 180 Building Landmark Tables cccccsssccccessssteceessssceeeeesseeeeeesseeeseessateeeessaeeeesseeeeeesssateaeesss 180 Mpornno Landmark es E a renee oe ee 184 EX DOUG AM GIN ANKS oreert ae a S E N 184 Adding Landmarks Manually c cccccsscccccssssseeeeessseeeceessseeeeeecseeseeeseesssatesesseteseesssateeeesss 185 Managing Materials ise cictcccecacdcccwuvntatacwuvetucennceeenassunnwaddundestuseduestaanswavueesssmeeeuana
111. ackground Vertical scale Data Hardware alarms Indication Link C scan cursor with channel Auto Display Direction Up Saving zones Tools Lissajous General display preferences Wamings Rotation angle mark Display null mark 7 Enable V Detection zone V Display red dot at center Hide rotation number v Display measurement vector Saen V Display mini strip charts Name splitting C scan Channel Type Prefix Display grid Horizontal Characters for prefix Vertical Characters for suffix aki C scan acquisition default scale C scan Type x Display all no scrolling Characters for prefix 0 Specific scale Characters for suffix 3 Inthe Strip Chart section select whether you want strip charts to display a time scale a distance scale or a sample scale affects display only during acquisitions 4 Inthe Vertical scale text box enter the scale steps in seconds millimeters or inches or number of samples Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 45 5 Inthe Display Direction drop down list select Up or Down If you select Up during acquisition the first data point is displayed at the bottom of the screen and the following points are placed above the first point After the acquisition the beginning of the acquisition first data seen by the probe is at the bottom of the screen and the end of the tube is at the top Visually the data is read from bottom to top If you select Down during acquisition the first
112. ad from channel dialog box opens Figure 3 94 Configuring the Read from channel processing unit Note a Read from channel Channels Filter Selected RLF1ico01 2 Select your channels from the list on the left To select one channel click the channel To select contiguous channels in the list click one channel press the SHIFT key and click the last channel that you want to select All channels between the first and last selected become selected as well To select non contiguous channels in the list press the CTRL key while clicking on all the channels that you want to select 3 Click Add All selected channels move to the Selected column If you want to add all channels simply click Add All 4 Once you are done selecting channels click OK To remove channels from the list of selected channels 1 Select the channels to remove from the Selected column 2 Click Remove All selected channels are removed from the Selected column If you want to remove all channels simply click Remove All If the list contains a large number of channels you can filter out all irrelevant channels by typing parts of the channel names that you are looking for in the Filter text box The channels that do not match the entered text are simply not displayed You can then make your selection from the list of displayed and filtered channels 3 Once you are done selecting channels click OK Chapter 3 P
113. an Parameters Display modified by Scan Parameters Click OK to return in Wizard mode all modifications will be lost Continue Cancel Clicking continue reverts your setup to its original wizard settings Chapter 2 Preparing Acquisition Setups with the Wizard Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 72 Setting General Application Preferences You must set certain application preferences before you start configuring any other part of the application Measurement parameters are some of them Setting Measurement Conventions Magnifi allows you to choose between two different measurement conventions ASME and EDF The ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineering method is the most commonly used whereas the EDF Electricit de France method is mostly used in France and within EDF subsidiaries see Figure 3 2 To choose a measurement convention 1 On the Settings menu click Preferences You can also click Preferences on the General toolbar The Preferences window appears Figure 3 1 The Preferences window Preherences Hamura convention Messuerend unis ASME Merrie sperial Channel Reset units Meters Full channel seale 7000 VV pep Delaul measured meine Hide Raw chancel Smplibade Peak ba peak E Precision Phase Peak fo paak ki Enable Amplitude 2 decimal places Phase Enable legin winds a decimal places 2 Inthe Me
114. andmarks window fa Landmarks Position mm Position From Begin Negative Positioning Enabled Threshold Import Click Import A standard Open window appears Browse to find the appropriate landmark file in xml format and click Open or double click the file icon Landmarks are imported in the Landmarks window Exporting Landmarks To do so 1 2 3 From the Settings menu select Landmarks The Landmarks window appears Click Export A standard Save As window appears Browse to find the appropriate location for the landmark file and click Save Landmarks are exported in xm format to the selected location Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 185 Adding Landmarks Manually To add landmarks manually 1 Place the data cursor at the first landmark 2 Right click in the code window and select the landmark to add or press F9 to add the first landmark in the list The list of available landmarks is the one created in the landmark table see Building Landmark Tables on page 180 Figure 3 131 Selecting a landmark to add zo Lao Add Landmark Properties Once set the position relative to the landmark is given at the bottom of the screen Figure 3 132 Manually added landmark position HiT T52 Y pos 2 554m Y smpl 5917 aY 0 081m T 1479s AT 40 5ms Y Lm T 1 4308 9 rom Managing Landmarks 186 Managing Materials Mag
115. annel name and use wildcard signs before and or after to signify that any other characters can be found before and or after the part of the channel name that you entered As you enter text in the search box only channels meeting the entered criteria will remain 3 Click Add to transfer the selected channels to the Used channels list To add all channels you do not need to select them first simply click Add All 4 Inthe Used channels list enter channel position values in the two columns to the right of the channel name shown Note The columns available to the right of the channel names depend on the type of probe used These columns accept copy and paste operations so if you have the proper values already entered in another software 1 e Microsoft Excel or even in another C scan you can cut these values and paste them directly in the proper columns 5 Once you are done entering channel values click OK The Build from channels process is configured Configuring the Build from G scan Process The Build from C scan process can only be the first process in a C scan It allows you to start processing from the results of an existing C scan To configure the Build from C scan process 1 Once you have selected the process from the Add Data Processing window see Figure 3 106 the Build from C scan Setup window appears Figure 3 108 The Build from C scan window Build from C Scan Setup Input C scan Tenes 2 From the d
116. ard all the modifications that you made Configuring Scan Parameters 132 For 2D Surface Polar Array Scans To set up scan parameters for 2D surface array polar scans 1 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings menu The Scan Parameters window appears Figure 3 73 The Scan Parameters window for 2D surface array polar scans Scan type Acquisition rate 5 Linear single asis scan bobbin Sampling clack Internal clock ha Tuberbore l Requested 800 0000 Hz 0 Rotating probe Bia probe Actual B00 Hz O Rotating aray probe 2D surtace scan A C scan onentation 0 Single channel raster scan O Single pass array probe T F i O Array probe raster scan Polar array scan i Polar raster scan Polar array scan Get position from Absolute Encoders ERIS Encoder tigger Enc Theta C scan Circumferential axis Axial asis From 0 000 deg 0 0000 mm Size 360 000 deg Size 32 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 500 degsmpl Grid resolution 0 5000 mmsmpl Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 2 Figure 3 74 133 In the Scan type section select Polar array scan under 2D surface scan When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Parameters window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder For more information on defining encoders se
117. are explained in the following pages Figure 3 136 Probe Manager window e lt Probe Manager Geometry Technique Model Catalog Number Tube From ID Surface Surface Surface Surface Surface Tube From ID Tube From ID Tube From ID Surface Tube From ID Surface Tube From ID Tube From ID Tube From ID Tube From ID Tube From ID TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TypicalProbe TestProbe Typical Fuel Rod PolarRaster Typical Fuel Rod Polar Typical Pencil Probe Mapping Typical Pencil Polar Raster Typical Corrosion Mapping Typical NFT Probe Typical MFL Probe Typical Boresonic Probe Typical Pencil Probe Typical DefHi Double Row Probe Typical Weld Probe Typical Bobbin Probe Typical RFT Probe Typical RPC Probe Typical DefHi Single Row Probe Typical Tube Array Probe amp New 7 lt Import Export Update Probe Models Sorting the Displayed Database You can sort the probe database by any of its four columns To do so simply click in the column title An arrowhead appears in the column title indicating whether the column is sorted in alphabetical order up arrow on the left or in reverse alphabetical order down arrow on the left Chapter
118. are many ways to edit those values Directly in the Report window or report status for displayed values From a separate window for all values For multiple entries simultaneously Directly in the Report Window or Report Status To edit report entry values directly in the report window or report status 1 2 Double click a displayed value The value becomes editable Change the value as needed For all numerical values and most text values type in the new value For some text values a drop down list appears select a new value from it Press ENTER or click outside the text box The modification 1s complete If in the Report window click OK to close the window From a Separate Window Depending on how you configured your report all gathered data might not be displayed However all gathered data is still editable but from a separate window To edit any of the gathered data 1 2 From the Report window or report status right click a line A contextual menu appears From the menu select Edit Entry The Edit Defect window appears where all gathered data is available for edition even data not displayed in the report Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data Figure 5 30 The Edit Defect window r Edit Defect 0 0 ECA Encirding C Users PSamson QTEC Doct Circ C scan Y Y test_jung2 3 827863 VPP 212 093510 PP 0 000000 mm 20 000000 Note From t
119. arm up sequence RUNNING and DONE e The Acquisition qty info box indicates the number of acquisitions accomplished since the test unit or Magnifi was started the most recent of either event f The Temperature info box indicates the temperature of the test unit in degrees Celsius 5 In the Serial Port sub section a The Receive qty info box indicates the number of communications received since either the test unit or Magnifi was started the most recent of either event Creating a Setup for the Test Unit 324 b The Transmit qty info box indicates the number of communications transmitted since the test unit or Magnifi was started the most recent of either event c The Baud rate drop down list allows you to select a new baud rate speed d The Activate check box validates the requested modifications for the Serial port sub section e The Empty button resets the data of the Serial port sub section Appendix C Mouse and Keyboard Functions 326 In Strip Charts Table D 1 Mouse and keyboard functions Ar Channel list Channel name Channel name i tr Data type Scale value Scale value Scale value Scale value Signal area Signal area Signal area Signal area Measurement cursor in signal area Left side of signal area Left side of signal area Left click Left click Right click Left click Left click Left click Right click Middle click Left click vertical drag
120. asurement convention section select ASME default or EDF Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Figure 3 2 ASME left vs EDF right 0 180 0 360 180 Phase is measured clockwise from 0 to 360 Phase is measured counterclockwise from 0 The 0 is along the negative x axis to 180 starting along the positive x axis and clockwise from 0 to 180 starting along the positive x axis 3 Click OK The measurement convention is set for the entire application Setting Measurement Units Magnifi allows you to choose between the metric and imperial measurement systems To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 From the Measurement units section select Metric or Imperial If you selected Metric you can select the specific measurement unit used in reports from the Report units drop down list m cm or mm If you selected Imperial the only measurement unit offered is in Figure 3 3 The Measurement units section Measurement units Metric Imperial Report units Milimeter Meters Centimeters Default measurement met Milli 3 Click OK The Preferences window closes and the measurement units are set for the entire application important Depending on the context elsewhere in the application certain measurement units may alternate between the two measurement systems Setting General
121. atabase of user probes coming from another computer for example There is no need to import the official database since it is already present with every license of Magnifi The official database is only updated as explained previously see page 194 To import a user probe database 1 From the Probe Manager window click Import The Select a User Probe Database to Import window opens 2 Browse to the location where you the file in xm format to import is located 3 Click Open The user probe database opens and the probe database is modified accordingly Managing Probes 196 Managing Probe Models With the Probe Manager you can not only manage individual probes but also probe models To do so 1 2 From the Settings menu select Probe Database The Probe Manager window appears In this window you see all default Eddyfi probes Click Models Types in the lower right corner The Probe Model Type Manager window appears where you can manage user probe models Probe models types with a grey background are standard Eddyfi probes They cannot be modified or deleted Figure 3 140 The Probe Model Type Manager window fo Probe Model Type Manager Probe Models Types Name Geometry Technique TypicalProbe Surface ECT TypicalProbe Tube from ID NFT TypicalProbe Tube from ID MFL TypicalProbe Tube from ID ECT TypicalProbe Tube from ID RFT Click Add A new line appears at
122. auensesnens 285 EDONG REDO see thc dial ote hin tate hn ott ta let ieee aS mae entra E 286 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting PRR RRR RRR 287 Quick Troubleshooting Guide ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 288 Upgrading the Ectane Firmware sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 290 Fixing Corrupted Ectane Firmware ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 292 Configuring Ectane for DHCP Protocol sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 294 Configuring Ectane for Static IP Addresses sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 295 Reinstalling Magnifi TT 297 Reinstalling the Software sicsccsescascccdcsiscccdcacsadacevcndanscacccededevewdecieassuiveanstesvicdetecdunacetdtenes 298 Managing License Keys eT 303 Upgrading Hardware License KeyYS cccsssssssesccssssssseecccennsseeeceencnseeeeeeensnseeeeenensssssesenenss 304 Obtaining Upgrade Codes c ccssccccssssceesseeeesseeeeeseeeeeceeececeteseceresesetesesatassseeesesaneeens 304 Upgrading to New License Keys ccsccccecessseeceessseeeeeesseeeeeeessaeeesecseseteseesenateeeessateeeesseaes 304 Upgrading Software License KeYS scccssssssscecccsnsnseeeceennsseeeceeecsnseeeeeuesnsseeeennnsnsssesesenas 306 Releasing Existing License Keys ccscscecsssscssesesscnssessessesseesessnserseusensens
123. bar at the bottom of the display see Configuring the Info and Status Bars on page 7 Understanding the User Interface Data Display Area The display area is where the actual data can be displayed in various formats Strip charts Lissajous A scans C scans Voltage planes Polar views etc gt gt gt important The display area is divided in sections called panes The data displayed in a pane is called a view Figure 1 7 The data display area ah Magri 3 30516 efeuh setup EEE View Settings Operator yout Specist Pep z eB ie Ode g gt DOS aS Ce Ea Sed CO GE ES ed Co Ce a Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 7 Configuring the Info and Status Bars You can choose the information that will be displayed in the info and status bars By default this information is identical To configure the information displayed in the info and status bar 1 Double click anywhere in the list found in the info bar The Information Bar Setup window appears By default all boxes are checked Figure 1 8 The Information Bar Setup window Note 2 3 oc Information Bar Setup Select parameters to be displayed Parameters Display info bar Display status bar Position Y Position Sample Y Sample Raw sample Cursor center time Delta Time Cancel Click the check boxes to select display or deselect hide the information fields
124. bers by more than one change the number under the Col button to any interval that you want Figure 4 32 Interval text box B 001 001 B Ol 0 Insert Row 1 Cok 13 total 0 inspected G Once you have created your inspection list you are ready to start performing acquisitions Creating Inspection Lists 250 Performing Acquisitions Once your system is balanced and calibrated you are ready to start performing acquisitions on a larger scale Data acquired can be recorded in automatic mode or in user activated mode By default Automatic recording is selected in the Setup tab Figure 4 33 Automatic recording activated gleDriver_2F magsetup C Setup Automatic recording Scan parameters Depth curves C scan Processed channels To perform acquisitions in automatic recording mode 1 2 3 Switch to acquisition mode by clicking the Acquis tab in the Control bar or by selecting Acquisition from the Operation menu Select a file from the file list in the Acquis tab Once you have selected a file you can start acquisitions in one of three ways By clicking Start on the Acquis tab of the Control bar By selecting Start from the Operation menu or By pressing F2 Data starts appearing in the different views as you scan The background appears in green meaning that data is saved automatically to the hard drive Note During an acquisition you can clear the Lissajous by selecti
125. box Setting Up Processed Channels 146 Saving Groups After you have properly configured or just modified a group of events you might want to save that group as a template for future use To do so 1 Click Save current group The Save Group Template window appears Figure 3 90 The Save Group Template window gt a Save Group Template C Users Public D ocuments File name Description OK Cancel Click the button A Browse to Folder window appears where you can choose the location where you want to save the file Browse to that location and click OK You return to the Save Group Template window Name the file in the File name field If necessary enter a description of the group in the Description field Click OK when you are done The file is saved in xml format at the location you chose in step 2 Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 147 Loading Groups After you have created and saved a certain number of groups as templates you can reload them for use at any given time Todo so a l 1 Click Load group The Load Group Template window appears Figure 3 91 The Load Group Template window Load Group Template C Users Publics Documents Test Group 1 xml Test Group 2 xml J Test group 4 ml File name Test Group 3 xml Description _ Cancel 2 Select a group from the list and click OK The group you
126. braries Magnifi Setup gt v Organize v New folder i gq K Favorites amp Magnifi Setup library ie W Desktop Includes 1 location j W Downloads Name Date modified di Dropbox IE Mes documents 4 Setup 12 U Recent C Users PSamson QTEC My Documents Magnifi m Inspection Project 2 2012 03 21 14 28 e folder T Libraries dE Inspection Project Test 2012 03 19 16 33 e folder Documents _ ECT_Bobbin_4pins 2012 0 MAGSETU E 365 KB Magnifi Data _ ECT_Bobbin_41pins 2012 05 16 13 45 MAGSETUP File 311 KB Magnifi Setup _ NFT_Standard 2012 05 16 13 45 MAGSETU z 280 KB a Music _ RFT_DualDriver_1F 2012 0 13 45 MAGSETU z 239 KB E Pictures _ RFT_DualDriver_2F 2012 0 3 45 MAGSETU E 289 KB H Videos _ RFT_SingleDriver_1F 2012 05 16 13 45 MAGSETU 230 KB _ RFT_SingleDriver_2F 2012 0 5 MAGSETU z 272 KB aa File name X Setup set magsetup Open Cancel Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 259 Loading Recently Used Setup Files If you recently used a setup file you can quickly access it by selecting it from the Recent Files item in the File menu Figure 5 4 Selecting a recent file View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help New an te S B m Load Setup f ge peo ABS FL Save Setup aa namme Sarees Ses Save Setup As Ctrl Shift S Save Setup and Edit Properties View Setup Properties Load Data fe Save Da
127. can type Acquisition rate Linear single axis scan bobbin Sampling clock Internal clack Tube bore Requested 17600 0000 Hz Rotating probe Actual 17600 Hz Array probe Rotating array probe 20 surbace scan C scan orientation Single channel raster scan 5 x x d Single pass array probe os A J Array probe raster scan Polar array can Polar raster scan Tube bore ingpection with a rotating probe Get position from Horizontal trigger Absolute Encoders Encodertrigger Circumferential axis Axial axis Needle Resolution check Tube ID 19 0000 mm Circumferential axis Axial axis Hinimum density 1 0000 ampl mm 1 0000 smnpl rarn Speed ratation 50 0000 Ips 1 0000 mm s Acquisition density aaa stp mim AO 0000 amgl mm Acquisition resolution 0 1696 romsmpl 0 0200 romsmpl Maximum probe speed 294 8555 Ips 60 0000 mms C scan Circumferential axis Axial axis From 0 deg 0 0000 rv Size 360 deg 1500 0000 m Display resolution 2 0000 deg smpl 1 0000 rims Min display resolution 71 0227 deg smpl Automatic axial display resolution ok Cancel 2 Inthe Scan type section select Rotating probe under Tube bore When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Parameters window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan 3 In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder For more
128. cccsnssseeccesnnsseeeeeensseeseesennssseeenes 72 Setting Measurement Conventions ccccscscsessssessssssessscsessseusessseusessceusesecensuscuensusauensusuens 72 Setting Measurement Units scscsssscsesssscsesssensesssensusssceusesssensuseueususeveuseveveusueseuseveneuseevens 73 Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Methods ccccccccssseccssseesssreeesseteesseteeesseteeeeees 74 Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Precision ccccccccsseccsssreeesseeeesseeeesseeeeesseteeesees 76 Setting Te FUN CHANNEL SCE a banehandanssenagaetetonianntauniaunsaanietd 77 Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information c cccccescccssssssesssseessseeeeesseeeeesseeeeesseeeeesees 78 SEUNG Materials IM WSC sinisiin nna a 79 Managing Setup Properties sccvcsicsscissccnnesevecsnsenncentatandeccausnantaeetsusacnduuscusesnncunenvassntessceduane 80 VIG WING PF ODO TIOS mrina N 80 CUITIING Eole E ee EE E dat Seatac ata tesa dune nat duct E boat dane aaah teak EEE dase E E 80 Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups scscccssssssecccsssssseeecesenssseeeeeenssseeesnenssseees 81 Configuring Encoders and Digital INDUtS cccccccessecccsseceesseeeecseeeeesseeeeseseeeessetesesseeeeesees 82 Configuring General ACQUISITION Parameters cceecccssceeessseeeeesseeeeesseeecesseeeeseeeeescseteeenees 86 Configuring Probe Topologies sccsssscsescsssssscrsusssensussseusussuensussueneusaueueusaneneusauneusanenensus
129. cepted tolerance in number of samples on landmark positioning in the Landmark Label field Higher values can account for greater inspection speed variations 5 The detection level relative to each landmark can be displayed and adjusted in the Lissajous view of this channel based on the default Land channel To activate this function check Activate output from the Output section 6 Ifan encoder is present in your setup you can choose to use it by selecting Use encoder in the Encoder section If no encoder is present this section is deactivated 7 Click OK The Detect landmark dialog box disappears and the Detect landmark processing unit is configured Editing the Copy to channel Processing Unit m The Copy to channel processing unit allows you to take all the input channels 3 af and output them under a different name after they have been processed This is _ eee i the only way to display processed channels in views To configure the Copy to channel processing unit 1 Double click the Copy to channel processing unit icon The Copy to channel dialog box appears Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 159 Figure 3 102 Configuring the Copy to channel processing unit Table 3 1 la Copy to channel Channel name creation method Free style Replacement pene Output channels Input MIX_0 Scale MIX MIX_1 Scale MIX R_A180 Scale ABS R_A90 Scale ABS R_A90 2 Scale ABS R_A90 8 Scale
130. chart The measurement vector blue is based on the data located at the position of the two cursors without considering other points between them Figure 5 11 Measuring with two points fe orro En n a rT HA 0 02 0 30 Measuring Indications 266 Absolute uses a straight line from the zero position to the main cursor position Absolute Peak uses a straight line from the zero position to the peak value of the data selection Manual allows you to use the mouse to manually trace a vector in the Lissajous The amplitude and angle values are calculated based on the vector green drawn on screen Figure 5 12 Measuring manually a orro J 3100 0 PP MR vm MaN foe Ea 0 67 Vpp 45 pp 96 OD You can also select amplitude and phase measurements mode from the contextual menu see Figure 5 10 For more information on the various measurements available for these measurements see Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Methods on page 74 Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 267 Selecting and Measuring Data in IRIS Projections Note For more information on view interface elements see Elements of a Projection View on page 29 The data selection is done in either the C scan or a projection view except cylindrical projection view To select data simply click on an indication in the C scan or projection view The data cursor automatically measures all data selected to appear in the
131. ck Save Setup A Save As dialog box appears Figure 3 154 Saving a setup 2 Browse to the directory where you want to save your setup file 3 Enter the name that you want to give to the setup in the File name field and click Save The setup file is saved in the directory that you chose under the name that you entered Saving a Setup under a Different Name If you need to create a setup and would like to base it on an existing setup you can simply load an existing setup and save it under a different name From there you can modify only the parameters that need to be modified in the newly saved setup To do so 1 With a setup loaded that you either loaded specifically for this operation or that you already have on screen select File gt Save Setup As A standard Save As dialog box appears Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 213 Figure 3 155 The Save As dialog box Dube modified Type G Libraries TOL F407 Ch Fale Poller Porumank MUNO LO 08 14 4 Fide folder eres TOUO O8 DOU Tie folder D Meyit Setup a Musk E Pastures H vtec I Computer osc GA Development Visrvdete Gage SolltveareT cars gredete gt AppheatianTeam iar Cpe Electrenie Marda E _ Flg aar ube Setae Save at fype Setup cet miun Hide Folders 2 In the dialog box browse to the location where you want to save the setup 3 Enter the name of the new setup in the File name text box 4 Click Save The n
132. cking Browse Changing Saved Data Directories When opening an inspection project a data directory is already defined for data gathered during the acquisition If you want to analyze data found in another directory 1 Figure 5 6 2 3 Click the folder icon in the top right corner of the Analysis tab The Select Directory window appears Clicking on the folder icon Ea uj Magnifi 3 0B8 Default setup File View Settings Operation Layouts Specia Si amp O 4 C Users PSams V3 0 0 1 2 Browse to the directory where you will find data to analyze Click OK The Select Directory window closes and all files available in this directory for analysis appear in the Analysis tab Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 261 Measuring Indications When performing data analysis one of the most important operations consists in measuring signals that could be a defect indication We can separate the measurement process in two steps Data selection Measurement Positioning Data for Selection When selecting data Magnifi offers two additional ways of accessing the displayed data centering and best fitting When centering Magnifi centers the displayed data based on the position of the data selection cursor When best fitting Magnifi centers the data AND adjusts the scale so that the maximum amplitude signal found within the data selection brackets reaches 75 in the
133. codes that you will need Once you are done adding indication codes click OK The codes in the list will be available when identifying indications during analysis Importing Indication Codes To import indication codes On the Settings menu click Indication Codes The Indications Codes window appears Figure 3 142 The Indications Codes window 33 Indication Codes Code Description Type Automatic Comment Color Del DEFT nnn Defect At least one code must have the type No indication for the No defect detected OK button to be available in the toolbar Cancel Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 199 2 Click Import A standard Open dialog box appears where you can browse to locate the file in xml format containing the indication codes 3 Click Open The codes are loaded in the Indication Codes window Removing Indication Codes To remove indications codes 1 From the Settings menu select Indication Codes The Indication Codes window appears 2 Select the indication code that you want to remove and click the red X in the Delete column The selected indication code disappears from the list 3 Repeat step 2 until you have removed all the indication codes that you want to remove 4 Once you are done removing indication codes click OK Exporting Indication Codes To export indication codes 1 From the Settings menu select Indication Codes Th
134. ctor is used in MFL mode frequencies are not available a Enter the timeslot number for each frequency on the Time Slot column Frequencies in the same timeslot are generated simultaneously b Check the box of the driver that will generate the frequency c Enter the amplitude in volts and the phase in degrees You can add frequencies by clicking Add When clicking Add the limitations indicated above are automatically taken into consideration Values are automatically recalculated to comply with the limitations Note You will get an error message if you edit the values manually to the point where you go over these limitations 7 Once you are done entering the topology window click Finish Your Ectane is now properly configured Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups 90 Configuring Impedance Topologies To configure impedance topologies Figure 3 18 Impedance topology parameters r Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders Gin Impedance T1 l Topologies Parameters for the selected topology 3 g a a Q m O m fid a a a E O Coil quantity 34 Impedance Bridge Channel Groups Absolute Differential Pole spacing 2 100 ohms Enabled Vv v Is circular Prefix ABS D Prefix _ Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg Gain 3 E MAR RS a ae 0 0 x Channel prefix T1 F2 150 i 2 50 0 0 x F3 200 2 50 0 0 x Resulting Channel Name F4 350 250 00 m T1F1D001 l Probe Protection Mi
135. d H Hyperlink Changes to next value Not linked 1 9 Linked H Hyperlink Opens a list of available links Click any to select Changes to previous next channel that is on this label Move to previous next indication Appendix D 333 In 3D G scan and 3D Polar Views Table D 4 Mouse and keyboard functions Channel name Channel name m t 2 bh Signal area Signal area Signal area Signal area Frequency Coil Link views Left click Left click Right click Left click Left click Left click Left click Left click Right click drag Left click drag CTRL left click drag Right click Left click Right click Left click Right click Left click In 3D C scan and 3D Polar Views Opens and closes the list of C scans Click any to select Changes to previous C scan in list Changes to next C scan in list Opens and closes the dialog box for 3D C scan properties Opens and closes the palette on the right of the 3D C scan view Toggles the view between horizontal vertical amplitude and phase components Vertically flips data representation Horizontally flips data representation Zooms data representation in and out Move the frames in 3D polar view only Rotates the 3D representation on all axes Opens a contextual menu in 3D polar view only Changes to previous next frequency for the same coil Changes to previous nex
136. d C scans as well as the default layout that you want to use Interactions between the Setup Wizard and Magnifi There are two ways of modifying a setup With the wizard or through Magnifi menus When you choose to modify a setup with the following Magnifi menus you are prompted to return to the wizard Scan Parameters Sizing Curves C Scan Processed Channels Instrument Configuration Wizard Figure 2 2 Attempting to modify a setup outside the wizard E up Werd Click E ig edi the scan crensian and the duration Chick Carta to proceed with the Gan Pareeter Conte Carce To modify the setup outside the wizard click Continue Setup Wizard 70 When you modify your setup without the wizard the corresponding Magnifi dialog boxes appears where you can make the necessary modifications to your setup Unless you save this modified setup under a different name your modifications will be lost and will revert to the original configuration the next time you use it If you attempt to modify a setup that was modified with regular Magnifi menus with the setup wizard you are prompted as follows Figure 2 3 Attempting to modify a setup with the wizard Setup Wizard x A The following Wizard steps may have been modified by the advanced settings Jp Component Definition modified by Scan Parameters amp Probe Selection modified by Scan Parameters 40 gt Scan Definition modified by Sc
137. d from data from the first channel in the Channel 1 list data from the second channel in the Channel 2 list is subtracted from the data from the second channel in the Channel 1 list and so on You can reorder the channels in each list by selecting them and using the up and down arrows to move them up or down the list 10 Click OK when you are done You are brought back to the Mix window 11 Click OK again to close the Mix window and finish configuring the Mix processing unit Editing the Scale Processing Unit m The Scale processing unit allows you to adjust the rotation and gain of a channel i BLA to bring a specific signal to a predefined angle and amplitude This process is sae required when performing a system calibration To configure the Scale processing unit 1 Double click the Scale processing unit icon The Scale dialog box appears Figure 3 99 Configuring the Scale processing unit n Seole MFF h t Param bers m a a Input channel Process Gari Manual Gein TotelGein Frocessrot Maust Toteirot Amoitude Phase invert phase a Sar phere OR calsralich ROHFF OMES LO MI mM M M LOD Ampu o mei Mie Phase bisi Ref Hoe Greisi Ief bal Mp eer metic Brgud Prik io prie r Phaze Prak bo pe x aan ln Mnmum Y Mare l 3 H Cancel CEE a Debais Heie maria rolate aid gar et Se gan eed poo J 1 2 If analyzing signals obtained from surface inspection array probes a Check the Single gain phase box to a
138. d phase 8 When you have finished configuring the topology click Finish Your Ectane is now properly configured Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Configuring Custom Topologies To configure a custom probe you need the PDK and a solid knowledge of probe design To configure custom topologies Figure 3 27 Custom topology parameters i Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders General p 1 l Topologies Parameters for the selected topology Channel Groups Gain 23 dB Transversal Channel prefix T1 Resulting Channel Name T1F1G1001 Coil quantity 34 Impedance Bridge Frequencies and Injections Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg 2a n 2 50 0 0 i Pole spacing 12 7 0 ohms Probe Protection Minimum frequency allowed 100 000 kHz Maximum amplitude allowed 8 00 V 1 Enter the required gain in the Gain field 2 Enter a channel prefix in the Channel prefix field The resulting channel name is indicated in the Resulting Channel Name field 3 Enter the number of coils in your probe in the Coil quantity field 4 Select the required spacing between poles in the Pole spacing drop down list 5 Select the proper impedance bridge from the drop down list in the Impedance Bridge subsection 6 Check the Is circular box if your probe is circular 7 Check the Use reference coils box if your probe contains reference coils 8 To properly pro
139. dard dialog box appears where you can browse to the location where you want to store your project files 4 Click Add to add an inspection in the Inspections List The Edit Inspection Information window appears Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 215 Figure 3 157 The Edit Inspection Information window Important 10 fa a Edit Inspection Information Name inspectionName Report Name InspectionName Setup Save as Inspection setup in Project folder z List format Row Column x Enter the inspection name in the Name text box Enter the report name in the Report Name text box In the Setup drop down list select how you want to manage the inspection setup file Save as Inspection Setup in Project Folder default value copy and rename the current setup and saves it under the project setup directory When you use this option you must already have the appropriate setup loaded in Magnifi Keep current name and location performs no action on the setup file The current name is kept and the file 1s not copied in the project setup directory This is the option to use if you prepare in advance several inspections and the current Magnifi setup is not necessarily the one to be used for this inspection In the List format drop down list select the list format that you want to use Row Column Zone Row Column Free format Import This last option allows yo
140. data point is displayed at the top of the screen and the following points are placed under the first point After the acquisition the beginning of the acquisition first data seen by the probe is at the top of the screen and the end of the tube is at the bottom Visually data is read from top to bottom Figure 1 55 Examples of data display directions down left up right l w o lalf e fe ra ave ro rT Data Data Start Ends First point Data Ends Data Start Managing Views 46 6 Inthe Link C scan cursor with channel drop down list select Auto Yes or No If you select Auto channel and C scan cursor positions are automatically linked when and if possible Cases where it would not be possible is if you are using a raster or polar scan or performing a back and forth inspection with an encoder If you select Yes it forces the position of the channel and C scan cursors to be the same This is useful when you display both types of views in the same layout This option does not work for raster scan types If you select No channel and C scan cursor positions are kept independent Configuring Individual Strip Chart Parameters Strip charts display inspection results generally over a time period and from bottom to top of the screen You can configure parameters that apply to all displayed strip charts measurement unit and display direction of strip charts s
141. deanienenseces 186 AGOMO NEW MATNA eaii sets E A Get ee et 187 Copying Existing Materials cccccccccssseccsssreessseeeeseseeeeseseteeeceeasesatesecaeeesatesesaeesesanesy 188 Removing Existing Materials cccccccecsssscceessssteeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeessaeeteeeesssaeesesseteseesseaseaeeses 189 Adding Notes to Materials ccccccccccsssssecesssseeeeeesseeecessseeeeeesseeseeeseeseeeeeseseeseeseessateeeesss 189 Managing ProDES ssatina aaan aoaaa aaia aaia Aaaa Aana 190 Sorting the Displayed Database cccsscccssssccessseeeesseeeeesseeeeseseeeccsseeeessseeeeseseeeeseseeesseaeess 190 AQUINO PODO Sein a N 192 REMOVING PROMOS aati Siesta Svs biaia a aa aes 193 MOGNO TOD GS cts acct a teat te S 193 DUDICAUNO OD GS nir ious dneusdiafovondhnslevaravtede moevmteeaevatetenecnderanasateimnavateratedetecntoretersteretads 194 Updating the Probe Database ccccccccsssscceesssseeeeeessseeeeeesseeeeeseesaeteeseseteseeseaeteneesseaeeess 194 Table of Contents Exporting Probe Database cccccccccssssececssseeeessseeeeeesseeeeeecsaeeeseesateeseeseneteeeessateesesseaes 195 IMPOFTING Prope Data aS e anea E aces eves eee cee 195 Managing Probe Models c ccsssssecsscsscsscrscsssnsusesscnssessesseseesscsensenseassansseesesseeseussseeseuseseess 196 Managing Indication Codes ccsssssssscccsssssesecccscnsseeeececnnnseeecennnsssseeenennsssseeennsssseeeenanas 197 Adding Indication G00 ee 197 iMporung IGNC AT
142. default amplitude and or phase measurement methods are set for the entire application Depending on the context elsewhere in the application other amplitude and or phase measurement methods may be offered Setting General Application Preferences 76 Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Precision Magnifi allows you to display more precise amplitude and phase data by increasing the number of decimals shown in the interface To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Inthe Precision section check the Enable box to activate the high precision mode Figure 3 6 The Precision section Precision v Enable Amplitude Fa decimal places Phase E decimal places 3 Enter the number of decimals that you need for amplitude and phase in their respective boxes 4 Click OK The Preferences window closes and the number of decimals entered for amplitude and phase will be used throughout Magnifi Modifications will also be made in the appropriate Lissajous Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 77 Setting the Full Channel Scale Magnifi allows you to set the full scale for all channels By default the full channel scale is set at 20V p p but you can set a different scale You can also hide the raw unprocessed channel To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from
143. defining encoders see page 82 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Acquisition rate Sampling clock lIntemnalclock Requested 800 0000 Hz Actual e010 Hz a From the Sampling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate is controlled by an internal clock an external clock or a preset encoder b Ifyou chose Internal clock enter the acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field c Ifyou chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use d If you chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested acquisition rate in the Requested field and the maximum acquisition rate in the Max acquisition rate field Note Depending on how the encoder is defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones selected for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 73 4 Figure 3 80 In the C scan orientation section select the button representing the orientation that you want to use for C scan
144. derstand the basic principles of C scan processes you can freely explore the remaining processes and learn more at your own pace Configuring the Build from channel Process The Build from channel process is usually the first that you add as it is the process by which you select the channels that will be processed and displayed in the C scan To configure the Build from channel process 1 Once you have selected the process from the Add Data Processing window see Figure 3 106 the Build from Channels window appears Figure 3 107 The Build from Channels window Build From Channels Available channels Used channels State Mannie Circ deg Asal mm Add all All et Insert inset Remove AI All Wizard Cancel 2 From the Available channels list select the channels that you want to process To select one channel click the channel To select contiguous channels in the list click one channel press the SHIFT key and click the last channel that you want to select All channels between the first and last selected become selected as well To select non contiguous channels in the list press the CTRL key while clicking on all the channels that you want to select Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 165 Important The text box above the list of available channels is in fact a search box that allows you to find only the channels that interest you You can enter part of a ch
145. dmark reference in this example TS1 Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 10 Figure 4 26 243 Using the data selection cursor and the data selection brackets select the signal shape in the Land channel strip chart that represents this landmark type Click the measurement button Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each landmark type that you have in the list Click Calibrate System calibration is performed based on the reference measurements taken Click Close Landmark calibration d Magnif IIR Setup trom ongnal data file C Users mgrener QILCDocuments Magna Data LandmarkilCT OATA OIILmagsata ti File View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help Zeb OO s eObbu F444 62 080 o CHK OD 285 i5 cB OBBODSBHAR vPP Sen Acai mayas ae 03 j wl N j pa p 29 40 Go Sen L B Aiar rconteg in poaraeni Srg ouves ts l ATAN Processed channas Channel Channel and Sizing Curves 763 oe 23 a a ew nee vee Jani LE rg C seae Prrewerweqyrewerwere err rwrrrrerrrerrry Preveerrwrerrarreverrrwyrry vvi i Cacan and Sizing Cerves j pen imis o er _ r S si ae ext a al As m TS ao 20 l as a0 om tS ame i Yp 644m iro ss ay 2 oiam a r PP 3 4T ives Yua SHEO an 2563 O 2563 C 7 ee ome vee Jase om Trae vt ard EE eS eee J at k eddyfi aii es k VYper0h4im V smpt256
146. e Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Methods on page 74 b A vector representing the measurement is then displayed in the Lissajous or voltage plane view c The calculated signal amplitude and angle are displayed in the measurement bar of the Lissajous or voltage plane display Figure 5 9 Calculated signal and angle j Measurement ty shortcuts y l a 10 65 00 e Pe oF MN OF j 1 0 vop Db pp 2 Click the Measurement shortcut at the bottom of the Lissajous or voltage plane Measurement is performed on the selected data The shortcuts give you additional measurement methods In voltage plane view it is even possible to define the measurement mode that you want to have on the shortcut button by clicking the arrow located on the bottom right side of the button 3 Right click in the Lissajous or voltage plane view A contextual menu appears and allows you to select the measurement mode of your choice Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 265 Figure 5 10 Selecting a measurement mode from the contextual menu Measure gt Maximum Amplitude gt Two points Phase d Absolute Best Fit Absolute Peak Properties se 3267 0 PP _ MR vm Jman eM ATT 61 OD You can select the Measure mode Maximum Magnifi automatically displays the measurement vector red and calculates the corresponding amplitude and angle Two points activates two additional cursors in the strip
147. e 10 000 Data Hardware alarms Indication Link C scan cursor with channel Auto Saving zones Tools Display Direction Up Lissajous General display preferences Wamings Rotation angle mark i v i V Display null mark 7 Enable Detection zone vV Display red dot at center Hide rotation number Choose vV Display measurement vector V Display mini strip charts Name splitting C scan Channel Type Prefix Display grid Horizontal 45 0 Characters for prefix Vertical 39 9 Characters for suffix C scan acquisition default scale C scan Type Display all no scrolling Characters for prefix 0 Specific scale Characters for suffix Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 41 3 Inthe Views color scheme section select from the Current scheme drop down list the color scheme that you want to use White is selected by default When you click a color scheme the colors underneath the drop down list change Figure 1 49 Choosing a color scheme r y Preferences oO N General Display Analysis Views color scheme Current scheme White B Whi Background Light gray N i Data Saan gray ue ieme alarms Cuin Indication Black and white printing Saving zones Tools 4 Click OK The selected color scheme is applied to the views in the current layout Customizing Color Schemes If none of the existing color schemes found in the Current scheme drop down list meet your requirements
148. e 5 7 Selecting data in the strip chart orr a A gt 3398 0 PP MR vm Mat In the Lissajous view it is also possible to adjust the selection size by moving the measurement brackets blue located in the mini strip without changing the size of the data selection brackets Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data Figure 5 8 263 Selecting data in the mini strip oreo lt a o 1 A COI Ta mlana 3246 0 Pe mR J vm Man m m If the data selected appears too small or too big in the Lissajous or voltage plane view you can change the scale value by left or right clicking the Scale button A manual scale can also be made by right clicking and dragging up or down in the data area of the view Measuring Data in Lissajous and Voltage Plane Note For more information on view interface elements see Elements of a Lissajous on page 15 or see Elements of a Voltage Plane View on page 18 There are three ways of enabling the measurement tools By using the Automatic measurement function By using measurement shortcuts By using contextual measurements Measuring Indications 264 To measure data 1 Click Automatic Measurement or select Automatic Measurements from the Operation menu a Automatic measurement is performed on the selected data The voltage and angle value are based on the Default measurement method defined in the General tab of the Preferences se
149. e Indications Codes window appears Figure 3 143 The Indications Codes window i Indication Codes Code Description Type Automatic Comment Color Da Sonn CAM Defect X DF2 Defect gt Aoa wnat Export At least one code must have the type No indication for the No defect detected OK button to be available in the toolbar Cancel 2 Click Export A standard Save dialog box appears where you can browse to the location where you want to save the indication codes file in xml format 3 Click Save The indication codes are saved at the selected location Managing Indication Codes 200 Setting Up Sizing Curves Sizing curves are used to correlate signal parameters to a physical dimension For example in tube inspection signal phase and or amplitude can be used to determine the depth of an indication or the percentage of wall loss In Magnifi a sizing curve is created in four simple steps 1 Configuration of general sizing curve parameters 2 Configuration of calibration points 3 Configuration of individual sizing curves 4 Calibration Configuring General Sizing Curve Parameters To configure sizing curves 1 Select Sizing Curves from the Setup tab in the Control bar or from the Settings menu The Sizing Curves Configuration window appears Figure 3 144 Selecting Sizing Curves r a ud Magnifi 3 3B1T6 Setup from orig u Magnifi 3 3B1T6 Setup from o
150. e License Information window 4 Figure B 9 License ID CBCDB54F 3282 4C0D AASC 791E72ECF974 Currently detected oo Ga TE SS OOOO Click Request Activation The Software Activation Request window appears The Software Activation Request window Eddyfi software activation is a two step process First a software activation file is created You must send this file to Eddyfi with one of the buttons below Upon reception of this file by Eddyfi we will send you an activation key The file was created in A MGrenier QTEC DocumentsiM Second you activate the software by using the activation key that you will receive Copy file as text Click Send file by email An email is automatically created and properly formatted from your default email software Send this email as is without changing the email s content Close the Software Activation Request window Once your request has been validated by our purchasing department you will receive a license file in txt format by email Save this license file in a commonly used folder on your workstation Upgrading Software License Keys 310 Upgrading to New License Keys To upgrade to the new license key 1 Select Manage License from the Special menu The License Information window appears 2 Expand the Software section Figure B 10 The License Information window W License Information Hardware Software License ID D65D3B95 7
151. e Panes created with the Multi split button horizontally or vertically are NOT resizable are dependent on the original pane and all show the same view Splitting Panes Vertically in Two To split a pane vertically in two LH 1 2 Figure 1 40 From the Layout toolbar click the Split vertically button Position the cursor over the pane that you want to split in two The cursor changes to this The Split Vertical cursor Rn Click in the pane The pane is split vertically in two with the same data displayed in both panes Note Panes created with a Split button horizontally or vertically are independent resizable and the view in each can be modified Managing Layouts 36 Splitting Panes Vertically in More Than Two To split a pane vertically in more than two 1 From the Layout toolbar click the Multi split vertically button The Multi split vertically window appears Figure 1 41 The Multi split vertically window Multi split vertically How many windows do you want to create 2 16 3 can 2 Enter the number of panes that you want to create between 2 and 16 and click OK 3 Position the cursor over the pane that you want to split The cursor changes to this Figure 1 42 The Split Vertical cursor Rn 4 Click in the pane The pane is split vertically in the number of panes that you entered in the Multi split vertically window Note Panes created with the Multi split button horizon
152. e Setup and Edit Properties View Setup Properties Load Data fe Save Data As Create Inspection Project Manage Inspection Project Recent Files gt Exit Alt F4 ny 1 Figure 1 78 The Close button baj Megeri LEIE gt ort corer Were be Dp L ym i bps MAF ij ie Dahir be soda wg d F 8 6 1 6 Tii E A m o n awe min ee LE at LT e I wl Er Se L dei r j i t Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Preparing Acquisition Setups with the Wizard Setup Wizard The setup wizard is a feature intended to simplify configuring the software for inspection The wizard guides you through all the setup parameters necessary to properly and logically configure Magnifi for inspection purposes Component Geometries The setup wizard is divided into two distinct categories of component geometries tubes and surfaces As understood by Magnifi tubes are geometries that are typical in heat exchanger applications These include internal and external probes that scan along the axis of tubes in a linear movement 360 coverage or a helical movement rotating probes In both cases conventional and array probes are supported Similarly as understood by the software surfaces are geometries that typically involve linear raster and polar scanning techniques on flat plates or large diameter pipes They include single channel pencil probes and complex
153. e controls in Magnifi on the Settings menu click Remote controls Inputs are only available when the associated digital input configured on the Encoder menu is set to Remote control In the example below it is possible to program the first three inputs with one of the functions presented here Figure 3 153 Remote Controls dialog box E al Remote Controls Action Activation Input 1 Start stop acquisition v On release v Input 2 Balance X On release z Input 3 Enter no indication code v On release Input 4 No action On release Input 5 No action On release A Inputs are available if they are assigned to Remote Control in the Ectane encoder page settings No action The input is available but has no function Balance Balances the probe Clear screen Clears the Lissajous only during acquisition Start acquisition Starts data acquisition When the automatic recording mode is enabled the function also starts recording data to a file Stop acquisition Stops data acquisition When the automatic recording mode is enabled the function also stops recording data to the file Stop acquisition is only available after Start acquisition Start stop acquisition Toggles acquisition on or off each time you activate the remote control If automatic recording is enabled it also record data toa file Start recording Starts recording data to a file The f
154. e page 82 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Acquisition rate Sampling clock lIntemnalclock Requested 800 0000 Hz Actual e010 Hz a From the Sampling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate is controlled by an internal clock an external clock or a preset encoder b Ifyou chose Internal clock enter the acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field c Ifyou chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use d If you chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested acquisition rate in the Requested field and the maximum acquisition rate in the Max acquisition rate field Note Depending on how the encoder is defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones selected for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 73 4 Figure 3 75 In the C scan orientation section select the button representing the orientation that you want to use for C scans X and Y axes Th
155. ed when setting up sizing curves see Setting Up Sizing Curves on page 200 but they can also be added in the Calibration Points window To add calibration points 1 From the Settings menu select Calibration points The Calibration Points window appears Figure 3 152 The Calibration Points window Note Note r Calibration Points C_EXP Add A 360 Remove Remove All 2 Click Add The first available field in the left column becomes editable 3 Enter a name for this calibration point 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have added all the calibration points that you will need 5 Once you are done adding calibration points click OK The calibration points in the list will be available everywhere reference points are needed To remove calibration points It is not possible to remove a calibration point that is already used for a channel or C scan calibration or for a sizing curve 1 From the Settings menu select Calibration points The Calibration Points window appears 2 Select the calibration point that you want to remove and click Remove The calibration point selected disappears from the list 3 Repeat step 2 until you have removed all the indication codes that you want to remove To quickly remove all calibration points click Remove All 4 Once you are done removing indication codes click OK Managing Calibration Points 210 Managing Remote Controls To access remot
156. ee page 44 In Magnifi you can also configure parameters that apply to each strip chart individually To do so 1 Right click over a displayed strip chart A contextual menu appears Figure 1 56 Strip chart contextual menu X Previous Zoom Full Extent Invert Measurement Cursors Adjust cursor size Best Fit Properties Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 47 2 Select Properties The Properties window for this strip chart appears In the Preview section you can see what will happen to the displayed data as you select to display elements and change colors Figure 1 57 Properties window for a specific strip chart Properties Display Preview Grid W Scroll bar Position cursors Hardware alarms Saved zones Data type Per channel Colors F C scan H Color Use global calor C scan Y ltem Background 3 In the Display section you can choose to display or hide Grid a grid with accompanying voltage scale Scroll bar a scroll bar specific to the selected strip chart visible when zoomed in on a part of the chart Position cursors a vertical and a horizontal line that follow the cursor as you move it over the strip chart Hardware alarms the level of hardware alarms not supported by the Ectane at this time Saved zones a green background indicating the data recorded in acquisition mode 4 In the Data type section you can select the type of data displayed either
157. een Captures Once you have made a screen capture you can save it for use 1n another application or document To do so 1 With the screen capture previewed in the Screen Capture window select Save from the File menu A standard Save image window appears 2 Browse to the directory where you want to save the screen capture 3 In the File name text box enter the name under which you want to save your screen capture Note Image files created with the Screen Capture tool can only be saved in bmp format 4 Click Save The screen capture is saved in the directory you chose under the name you gave it Printing Screen Captures Once you have made a screen capture you can print it directly from Magnifi To do so 1 With the screen capture previewed in the Screen Capture window select Print from the File menu The Print window for your default printer appears 2 Configure your print job as necessary and click OK The screen capture is printed to your default printer Closing the Screen Capture Tool Once you have performed your screen capture tasks you can close the Screen Capture tool by selecting Close from the File menu or by clicking the Close box in the top right corner of the window Note Jf you normally use a color scheme that is not compatible with Windows 7 Basic you revert to that color scheme on closing the Screen Capture tool Using Screen Captures 270 Creating Bubble Notes When using screen ca
158. eld To properly protect the probe enter the minimum frequency and maximum amplitude allowed in the Minimum frequency allowed and Maximum amplitude allowed fields of the Probe Protection section To enable channel groups check the Axial and or Transversal box es in the Channel Groups section You can also assign prefixes to these channel groups in the Prefix fields under the appropriate column Enter the frequency amplitude and phase for each channel group that you need To add frequencies click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups section This adds a new line of data maximum of four under the first where you can also enter the proper frequency amplitude and phase Once you are done entering the topology window click Finish Your Ectane is now properly configured Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Configuring Orthogonal Topologies To configure orthogonal topologies Figure 3 21 Orthogonal topology parameters 93 j Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders General Topologies E Orthogonal T1 Orthogonal T1 Parameters for the selected topology Impedance Bridge Coils quantity 34 Channel Groups Poles spacing 12 100 Ohms Enabled Is circular Prefix Use reference coils Gain 23 dB Channel prefix T1 Resulting Channel Name T1F800TROO1 Probe Protection Minimum frequency allowed 100 000 kHz Maximum amplitude allowed 8 00 V Differential v D Abso
159. elease your existing software license key 1 Start Magnifi 2 Select Manage License from the Special menu Note Jf no license is installed the License Validation Failure window appears Figure B 4 The License Validation Failure window License Validation Failure an Magnif cannot run without a valid licence Please make sure that you have a valid licence to run the software lf you have a valid hardware key please insert it in a USB port on your workstation and click Retry lf you need to manage Magnifi licences please click Manage If you want to save your setup and quit the application please click Exit An instrument can serve as a basic hardware key To use your instrument as such click Connect Retry Exit Manage 3 Click Manage The License Information window appears 4 Expand the Software section Appendix B 307 Figure B 5 The Licence Information window Figure B 6 7 8 4 ceeroroe II E Hardware E Software License ID ID 65D3B95 7901 4C13 8698 9812B658085D Currently detected eit Licensee License type Ss A Request activation Click Release license You are asked to confirm you choice of releasing the license The Release Software License window appears The Release Software License window A license release process is required to inform Eddyfi when a workstation will no longer be using a license This process makes the license ava
160. elect the button representing the orientation that you want to use for C scans X and Y axes This only affects how data is displayed is has no effect on the scan itself Figure 3 42 The C scan orientation section C scan onentation ato LF Important In a tube bore configuration the X axis represents the circumference while the Y axis represents the length of the tube 5 In the Tube bore inspection with a rotating probe section configure your basic scan parameters Configuring Scan Parameters 112 Figure 3 43 The Tube bore inspection with a rotating probe section Figure 3 44 Tubebore inspection with a rotating probe Get position from Circ and axial encoders Aboslute Encoders Encoder trigger Circumferential axis Asial axis a Inthe Get position from drop down list select what device will provide probe positions The list of available devices depends on the selection made previously in the Sampling clock drop down list If you selected Internal clock or External clock from the Sampling clock drop down list the following choices are available Circ and axial encoders Circumferential encoder Vertical Trigger And Axial Encoder Horizontal trigger Vertical trigger Index channel Horizontal Trigger And Axial Encoder Acquisition clock If you selected a preset encoder in the Sampling clock list only the following are available Circ and axial encoders Circumferential encoder Acquisition clock
161. enens 88 Configuring Ectane IRIS Acquisition Setups ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 100 Configuring General IRIS Parameters ccccccccsscccsssseessseeessseeeeessereeesseteeesseteeessetesseseteeens 101 Configuring IRIS specific Parameters c ccccscccccsssccesssreeesseeeeesseeeessseteeessatessssetesessateeens 103 Configuring Scan Parameters sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 104 For Linear Single AXxiS SCANS cccccsssscsessssesessssesessuseseseusesesensessunseseueuseseuenseensussusauensusauens 105 For Tube Bore Scans with Rotating Probes cccceccssssccsssssesessseeessseeeeesseteeeseteeesseeeeesees 109 For Tube Bore Scans with Array Probes cccccccccssecssssecssseeeesseeeeessereeeeetesesetesseseteeesees 114 For Tube Bore Scans with Rotating Array Probes ccccccccssccssssresesseeeeesseeeeeseteeesseteeesees 118 For 2D Surface Raster Scans Single Channel cccccsccccsssecessseesssseeeessseeeeeeseteeesseteeesees 122 For 2D Surface Scans with Single Pass Array Probes cccccccsssecssssresssseeeeessreesseteseesees 125 For 2D Surface with Raster Scan Array Probes ccccccssccssssessssseeeessereeesseeeseseteeeseteeesees 129 For 2D Surface Polar Array Scans cccccccsssesesssessscssesessuseseseusessuensessueusesevensuseuensesavensusanens 132 FOr 2D Surface Polar RASTER SCANS sirsiran a aa 136
162. ensunsevensssessenusnsenss 306 Requesting New License Keys ccccssscccessssseeeeessseeeeeesseteceessaeeesecseseteseeseaeteeeessateesesseaes 308 Upgrading to New License Keys ccsccccecsssseceessseeeeeessseeeseeseneeeseessseteseeseeateeeessaeeeeesseaes 310 Operating TC7700 amp MS5800 ETT 311 Installing Software for the TC7700 and MS5800 c ssssssscccsssssseeccesssssseeeeeennsssseeeseess 312 Establishing Communication With Magnifi ssscscccssssseecccssnssseeeeeensnseeeeeensnssseeesenas 313 Creating a Setup for the Test Unit ccssssssscccsssssseeeccenessseeecesnesseseeenesnseeeneennsssesenennnsees 314 Setn UP GHANESE 315 SE CUMG UP EMGOGETS niniin aN 320 Viewing Legacy Setup NfO ccccscscsessssssessssssesssseuerssseneussseueususeueususeneusuueueususeunensenensusenens 322 Mouse and Keyboard Functions eee 325 n SUID Ghants aaraa aa a Aa a 326 i EiSsSajouS VIEWS ciscccccstiscecucuiasinccctvassaweudanasaiaccousscdianseutuecsessuttcndedeavedsatabcaseustecarvecieuacs 328 In G SCan and Polar Views ccris oniani naroa aaan a aaa aaa Aaa a 331 In 3D C scan and 3D Polar ViGWS ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 333 in Side VIEWS orsin N A a A 335 General Keyboard Shortcuts ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 337 VISCONTI AMO OUS aa a a A a A aa E A 338 introducing Magnifi 2 Starting Magnifi O
163. ent Configuration Wizard El Topologies Conventional Probe T1 Type Unit Resolution Filter External Quadrature imm iw 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz PresetActiveLow Quadrature mm 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz PresetActiveLow Quadrature Emm w 1 000 countimm 250000 Hz PresetActiveLow Logic Active low F Active low Active low F Active low F Active low You can select how each input is used When Function is Not used the digital input signal is not considered by the Ectane When Function is Enable acquisition Only one of the inputs can be so configured The function is used to stop data acquisition while maintaining the recorded file open The function only works when the acquisition is based on an encoder It can be used to momentarily pause the acquisition to move the scanner for example When Function is Remote control the digital input is used to perform a remote software function based on active low or active high logic See Managing Remote Controls on page 210 Some digital inputs may not be available if encoder features are selected because encoders and digital inputs share common pins on the connector as illustrated here Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Figure 3 15 Inactive digital inputs according to encoder settings
164. enu The Scan Parameters window appears Figure 3 68 The Scan Parameters window for 2D surface with raster scan array probes Scan type Acquisition rate gt Linear single axis scan bobbin Sampling clack Internal clack Tube bore Requested 800 0000 Hz O Rotating probe E Actual ani Hz O Rotating aray probe 20 surface scan C scan orientation O Single channel raster scan Array probe raster scan Polar array scar Polar raster scan Raster scan surhace inspection array probe Get position from Absolute Encoders E ncodertrigger m aMiS aeie Encoder Encoder r C scan Hals anis From 0 0000 ood 8 mm Size 2000 0000 mm 2000 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 5000 mm smpl 0 5000 mm smpl Configuring Scan Parameters 130 2 Figure 3 69 In the Scan type section select Array probe raster scan under 2D surface scan When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Parameters window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder For more information on defining encoders see page 82 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Acquisition rate Sampling clack lnternal clack T Requested 800 0000 Hz Actual agi Hz a From the Sampling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate is controlled by an internal
165. ep and 2 from the previous steps What is described in the following pages applies to a standard ECT tube inspection probe Your options may vary To do so 1 Inthe Probe Manager dialog box click New The Probe Wizard dialog box opens Figure 3 138 Probe wizard ge Probe Wizard fm i tie l ia 7 Main Parameters Geometry technique scans and sensor Enter the main parameters for the probe definition Geometry Tube from ID Surface Technique ECT IRIS MFL NFT RFT Sensor Single Array Combo Scans Single Pass Single topology Conventional 2 From the first step select the user probe s geometry inspection technique sensor type and the scan types to be performed Click Next Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 3 193 For the second step enter the user probe general information model name catalog number if any connectors with which it will work probe diameter central frequency and if necessary a specific description of the probe Click Next Note You can add a new probe model by clicking New from that step or modify the existing model by clicking Manage 4 9 For the third step enter the user probe topology information use of a pre amplifier and the enabling of drivers Click Next For the fourth step enter the user probe channel group information which are enabled and act as triggers You can also modify the channels prefixes and name Click F
166. eparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 127 5 In the Single pass scan surface inspection array probe section configure your basic scan parameters Figure 3 66 The Single pass scan surface inspection array probe section Single pass scan surface in pection array probe Get position fram Encoder ha Wf Absolute Encoders Scan direction AMIE kd m ans anis Encodertigger Encoder ka Encoder r Frobe part speed 138 9889 0 0000 Acquisition resolution 0 1736 rom smpl Acquisition density 5 F604 smpl mm eran a Inthe Get position from drop down list select what device will provide probe positions The list of available devices depends on the selection made previously in the Sampling clock drop down list If you selected Internal clock or External clock from the Sampling clock drop down list the following choices are available Encoder Non standard clock Acquisition clock If you selected a preset encoder in the Sampling clock drop down list only Encoder is available b If you selected encoders from the Get position from drop down list check the Absolute Encoders box if necessary This option allows you to use negative and positive position values c Inthe Scan direction drop down list select the axis along which the acquisitions will be performed Depending on this selection the relevant fields in the columns underneath will activate d Ifyou selected Encoder from the Get position from drop down list select the appropriate enc
167. epresentative data coming from heat exchangers The default setup provided with Magnifi includes two landmarks named TS1 and TS2 which represent tubesheets at both ends of the heat exchanger Different and or additional landmarks could be present in your setup if you have changed the default Landmark table see Building Landmark Tables on page 180 The purpose of this calibration is to associate a signal shape to each landmark that needs to be detected by Magnifi During calibration Magnifi evaluates the best way to automatically detect this signature so that every time a file is read the landmark can be automatically placed in the code window To calibrate landmarks 1 Acquire a tube from the exchanger or if you are in analysis mode read a file coming from the heat exchanger 2 Temporarily change one strip chart and one Lissajous to show the channel named Land This channel is automatically created by the Detect Landmark process see Editing the Detect Landmark Processing Unit on page 157 3 Select Operation gt System Calibration or click System calibration from the General toolbar The Calibration window appears Figure 4 25 The Calibration window A 2 Calibration Channel Channel and Sizing Curves Sizing Curves C scan C scan and Sizing Curves IRIS Landmark TS1 TS2 4 Select Landmark All landmark types present in the Landmark table should be listed 5 Click on a lan
168. er the code that you want to replace CODE1 Enter a description for that code in the Description column Select the type of indication in the Type list Defect indication that is not man made and is usually the result of wear and tear on the part pitting corrosion etc Such code types when added to the report will include signal measurements and sizing if sizing curves are defined Managing Indication Codes 198 Note No Indication signifies that no indications were found in that inspected tube or surface You must create one of this type of indication to have access to the green check mark in the Indication Codes toolbar for more information see From the Indication Codes Toolbar on page 278 Only one code can be associated with the No Indication type Feature an indication that describes a characteristic of the tube but for which there is no measurements required plugged obstructed suspicious dirty rough etc Selecting a feature also activates the Color flag column see below If you want to add text automatically in the Comments column whenever you add this code to a report enter it in the Automatic comment column When you select Feature in the Type column the Color flag column becomes active This assigns a color to the icon that will be added to the Indication Codes toolbar Each feature code has its own icon in this toolbar Repeat steps 2 and 7 until you have added all the indication
169. ers dialog box appears Figure C 9 The TC7700 MS5800 Encoders dialog box Encoders leal Counter setup Toptour Select counter 1 v Activate Name Encoder1 Name Toptour Asni 2 Properti Counts unit roperties maid Type Quadrature v Resolution 1 Acquisition type Intemal z Samples unit 0 Fiter 51200Hz v Action upon start Reset x Preset 0 zea Value 0 V Divider mode Upanddown Filter 250kHz v Units Count mm z Resulting divider 2 Divider 1 Tomolll MS5800 preset mask uPreset O1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 When you ve configured all the parameters click Apply to sent the configuration to your instrument You can then close the dialog box by clicking the close button in the top right corner Defining General Encoder Parameters The first part of setting up encoders when working in a TC7700 is defining the general encoder parameters To do so 1 In the Encoders dialog box select the synchronization type to trigger the acquisition in the Acquisition type list Internal the acquisition is triggered at the rate specified on the Global tab of the Channels dialog box see page 316 External the acquisition is triggered by the rate of the external clock Counter n the acquisition is triggered by the encoder motion the master board supports up to four encoders In the Counts unit text box type the number of counts per unit of your encoder resolution In the Samples u
170. ers window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan 3 In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder For more information on defining encoders see page 82 Figure 3 47 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Acquisition rate Sampling clack Internal clack r Requested 4000 0000 Hz Actual 4000 Hz a From the Sampling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate is controlled by an internal clock an external clock or a preset encoder b Ifyou chose Internal clock enter the acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field c Ifyou chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use d If you chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested acquisition rate in the Requested field and the maximum acquisition rate in the Max acquisition rate field Note Depending on how the encoder is defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones selected
171. es click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups section This adds a new line of data maximum of four under the first where you can also enter the proper frequency amplitude and phase 9 Once you are done entering the topology window click Finish Your Ectane is now properly configured 7 2 iP gt Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups 92 Configuring Short Double Driver Topologies To configure short double driver topologies Figure 3 20 Short double driver topology parameters aS z Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders R Gand Short Double Driver T1 El Topologies Parameters for the selected topology E Short Double Driver T1 Coil quantity 34 Channel Groups Axial Transversal Pole spacing 12 v Enabled v 7 Is circular Prefix A T Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg 50 0 0 nx Gain 23 dB Channel prefix T1 Resulting Channel Name T1F1T001 Probe Protection Minimum frequency allowed 100 000 kHz Maximum amplitude allowed 8 00 V Add Enter the number of coils in your probe in the Coil quantity field Select the required spacing between poles in the Pole spacing drop down list Check the Is circular box if your short double driver probe is circular Enter the required gain in the Gain field Enter a channel prefix in the Channel prefix field The resulting channel name is indicated in the Resulting Channel Name fi
172. est_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 Channel C Scan Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ File name ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling 7 Report C Users PSamson QTEC Documents Magnifi Data Report mdb X pos 176400 331200 18000 172800 172800 172800 176400 172800 270000 93600 176400 331200 18000 172800 172800 172800 176400 172800 X axis units mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 213 00 213 75 253 25 102 50 120 50 139 75 162 50 Y leng 6 0000 4 0000 4 5000 70 500 3 0000 2 0000 1 5000 1 0000 9 5000 7 0000 6 0000 4 0000 4 5000 70 500 3 0000 2 0000 1 5000 Y axis units mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Insert Insert Copy Delete Delete All Edit Sot Print 1 0000 ader Boot 7 2 From the buttons at the bottom of the window click Options The Options window appears 3 Click the Columns tab see Figure 5 19 The Visible columns list contains al
173. esult dialog carefully All incompatibilities and non converted items will be listed and briefly explained Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 223 Figure 4 7 The Conversion Result dialog box Conversion Result Converting Encoders Encoders Converted 4 of 4 Channels Timeslots Converted 1 of 1 Frequencies Converted 1 of 1 Generators Converted 1 of 1 Inputs Converted 1 of 1 Channels Converted 1 of 1 7 Click OK to dismiss the dialog box and complete the conversion Important If you want to keep the original acquisition setup file after conversion you must use Save Setup As from the File menu Otherwise if you simply select Save Setup from the File menu the original TC7700 setup file will be overwritten permanently Fine Tuning Converted Setups After you have converted an existing setup file there is a number of parameters that you cannot change However certain basic parameters can still be fine tuned Gain Frequencies Amplitude Phase To fine tune these parameters wi 1 From the Settings menu select Acquisition Setup gt Converted Setup Fine Tuning You can also click the Converted setup fine tuning button in the Acquisition Setup toolbar The Converted Setup Fine Tuning window appears Loading Setup Files 224 Figure 4 8 The Converted Setup Fine Tuning window Converted Setup Fine Tuning Gain HH dB Frequencies Name Value kHz Fe a Generator Amplitude V Phase
174. etected landmark This is known as negative positioning 7 If you want to use negative positioning check the Enabled box in the Negative Positioning section This activates a threshold value box where you indicate the threshold at which negative positioning becomes effective To better understand these principles see the following figures Managing Landmarks 182 Figure 3 128 Positioning concept 1 Position from beginning positive positioning display direction down Probe TS1 TS1 3500 m TS2 i T52 gt vr Operator side Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 183 Figure 3 129 Positioning concept 2 Position from beginning negative positioning of 3000 display direction down Probe TS1 0 TS1 gt TS14 1000 3000 TS2 1500 nas 6000 a x Operator side 8 Once you are done selecting the positioning you can sort your landmarks by clicking Sort This allows you to continue modifying the landmark table Otherwise the landmark table will be automatically sorted when you click OK 9 You can also remove landmarks by selecting them from the list and clicking Remove You can also start your landmark table anew by clicking Remove All 10 When you are done setting up your landmark table click OK Managing Landmarks 184 Importing Landmarks To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Landmarks The Landmarks window appears Figure 3 130 The L
175. ew A contextual menu appears Figure 1 66 A scan contextual menu Properties Minimize view 2 Select Properties The Properties window appears Figure 1 67 A scan Properties window z Properties Data Higa Background FT IV Pin D Measurements Detection lv Frontwall Red V Measurements V Detection lv Backwall Bue V Measurements V Detection lv TGC Goldenrod vV Measurements 3 Check the box next to the visual tool that you want to display in the A scan pin gate front wall gate backwall gate TGC slope 4 For each displayed visual tool select Measurements if you want to display measurement values for every time you modified the selected gate 5 Also for each displayed visual tool except for the TGC select Detection if you want to display a vertical line indicating the detected echo 6 Click OK when you are done The selected options now appear in the A scan Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 97 Configuring A scan View Parameters All A scan views come with two tabs that allow modification of some general settings and all gate setting These settings apply as soon as entered To setup general A scan view parameters Figure 1 68 General A scan view parameters ceeceseccccecesecsesose Scan Duration 0 00 mm Gain 8 0 dB Tension 300 000 V Input Filter 4 5 24 MHz Rectification Yes bd Smoothing Filter 7 5 MHz i h a Set the length of the scan in the Scan Durat
176. ew setup file magsetup is saved at the location that you chose Saving Setups 214 Creating Inspection Projects Before you start a new inspection project you have to determine what will happen to the files created during that project Inspection projects can be varied client outage inspection type etc and there constituting inspections just as such You create inspection projects through the Create Inspection Project window To do so 1 From the File menu select Create Inspection Project The Create Inspection Project window appears Figure 3 156 The Create Inspection Project window P a Create Inspection Project X Project Name Inspection SXSW Current Project location C Users PSamson QTEC Documents Magnifi Setup lnspection Project 2 Inspections List Use Local Inspection Setup Row Column Not Created Use Local Inspection Setup Row Column Not Created Adi Edit Inspection Information Folder and files structure New inspection C Users PSamson QTEC Documents Magnifi Setup inspection Project 2 Inspection SXSW Inspection SXSW RFT Setup Setup RFT magsetup Data Data rowcol magdata ist AData list Ist Reports Report mdb Tubesheet Tubesheet Screen capture Pictures 2 Enter the name of the inspection project in the Project Name text box 3 Click the Browse button next to the Current Project location text box A stan
177. fic Tasks on page 229 3 Back to nominal Returns the signal to the nominal point stored previously see Editing the Voltage Plane Processing Unit on page 156 see also Performing RFT Specific Tasks on page 229 4 Save nominal Saves the current adjustment to the nominal value see Editing the Voltage Plane Processing Unit on page 156 see also Performing RFT Specific Tasks on page 229 5 Indication code Indicates the code that will be assigned to an indication when you click it assignment 6 Sizing curve Displays the sizing curve view available for reporting selection 7 Measurements Measurements are displayed based on the measurement method selected Anew measurement has been added in Magnifi 3 1 ext which displays the circumferential extent of an indication Managing Layouts 20 Side View Figure 1 20 Side view 1068 9i1mm 1148 30mm 12 81V eee Ce Ce Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Elements of a Side View All side views are presented the same way with the same elements as displayed below Figure 1 21 The side view management bar 1 2 1068 91mm 1148 30 mm 8 20 V Table 1 6 Description of side view management bar items 1 Channel C scan list 2 Channel C scan name 3 Channel C scan label 4 Data type 5 Axis 6 Measurements 7 Scale 8 Frequency 9 Coil 10 Link Managing Layouts Gives you access to the list of available channels or C scans F
178. formation Folder and files structure New inspection C Users PSamson QTEC Documents InspectionPy Tube Sheet 1 Setup Setup Tube Sheet 1 magsetup Data Data rowcol magdata List Data List Ist Report Reports Report mdb Tubesheet Tubesheet Screen capture Pictures 2 Ifthe project opened by default is not the one you are looking for click Browse next to the Project Name text box From the Open window that appears select the inspection project that you want to open 3 In the Inspections List select the inspection that you want to analyze and click Open The inspection opens with the appropriate analysis folder selected Opening Inspection Projects 258 Loading Setup Files When ready to analyze data you need to load a setup file There are three different ways to load a setup file By loading an existing setup file By loading a recently used setup file By loading the original setup file However before loading a setup file you should make sure that your general analysis options are to your liking see Setting Analysis Preferences on page 256 Loading Existing Setup Files To load an existing setup select Load Setup from the File menu A window opens where you can select from many existing setups You can also browse through directories to find the setup file that you want Figure 5 3 Loading an existing setup file rc uj Open S p Li
179. formation fields FE WT 1 94 mm WL 29 9 ID 22 6 mm OD 26 4 mm dA 750 0 mm dC 180 0 deg Linking Views Once you have laid out your different views in Magnifi you can link some or all of those views in such a way that modifying a view modifies all views linked to it To link views click the link button see Understanding Basic Layout Elements on page 11 in each of the views that you want to link so that they all show the same number All views with the same link number are linked When views are linked changes in the following are replicated in all linked views Displayed channel C scan Channel name Channel label Data type Managing Views 62 4 Data component horizontal vertical channel Scale Frequency Coil Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 63 Displaying Mouse and Keyboard Functions Magnifi offers many mouse and keyboard functions If you need help remembering all these functions you can easily review them directly from the program To do so select Mouse and Keyboard Functions from the Help menu Figure 1 75 The Help menu q Mouse and Keyboard Functions _ p About Magnifi SLA meot oven p ea 00K 2 2 The Mouse and Keyboard Functions window appears Figure 1 76 The Mouse and Keyboard Functions window E za Mouse and Keyboard Functions Mouse and keyboard functions In Strip Charts Area Action Pointer F
180. from channels 1 e for bobbin probes or from C scan axes i e from array probes 5 In the Colors section you can choose the colors that you want to use for the strip chart These colors are the same as the ones defined in Configuring Views Colors on page 40 6 Click OK when you are done The selected options now appear in the strip chart Managing Views 48 Configuring General Lissajous View Parameters Lissajous provide information not easily available from other types of views Some information can be hidden or displayed during the acquisition or when performing analysis In Magnifi you can configure parameters that apply to each Lissajous individually see page 51 or to all displayed Lissajous The following procedure explains what are the tools and how to activate deactivate them for all Lissajous To configure Lissajous 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Click the Display tab Figure 1 58 The Display tab 440 III Preferences K Views color scheme Strip Chat Current scheme White Time Distance Background Vertical scale 10 000 Data f Display Direction Up Hardware alarms Indication Link C scan cursor with channel Auto Saving zones Lissajous General display preferences Wamings Rotation angle mark v i AL ll rk v i Display null ma 7 Enable Detection zone vV Display red
181. g window im Magnifi 3 16272 Default setup File View Settings Operation Layouts e mee fo 4 Setup Acquis Analysis a Tade CAU defaut magsetup C Setup Automatic recording Scan parameters Depth curves C scan Processed channels k By double clicking Processed channels the Data Processing window appears Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 143 Figure 3 86 The Data Processing window GP Dota Processing TTT me a Ca Ca p a o Creating Groups The first step in creating a channel processing routine processed channel is to create a group that will contain all the events individual processes applied to acquired signals To create a group click Create a new group in the Data Processing window A tab appears in the lower left corner of the Data Processing window This tab is where all events for that group will appear Figure 3 87 A group tab at the bottom left of the Data Processing window Setting Up Processed Channels 144 Deleting Groups To deleting a group select the tab of the group that you want to delete and click Remove current group 7 g i y A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the deletion Click Yes and the group is deleted Duplicating Groups Duplicating a group is useful when you need to create a new group that is similar but not identical to an existing group By duplicating you actual
182. ginning and end of the C scan 6 If you do not want to enhance the quality of Lissajous plots clear the Lissajous plot enhancement check box It is selected by default 7 Click OK The Median Filter Setup window disappears and the Median Filter process is configured Configuring the Interpolation Process The interpolation process allows you to improve the look of the C scans by smoothing the details on screen without losing data integrity To configure the Interpolation process 1 Once you have selected the process from the Add Data Processing window see Figure 3 106 the Interpolation window appears Figure 3 112 The Interpolation window Interpolation Orientation Circ Arial o Apply blas distance 4 Ppl 2 Inthe Orientation section select the direction along which data points will be interpolated Cire or Axial or X or Y depending on scan parameters Important You also need to reopen the scan parameters see Configuring Scan Parameters on page 104 to reduce the C scan grid resolution for the same axis on which the interpolation process was set i e an initial Circ resolution of six degrees If the resolution is reduced to two degrees two interpolation points will be added between real data points Managing C scans 170 3 In the Max distance text box enter the number of points that will be interpolated in the C scan The higher the number of interpolation points the smoother
183. grid the distance covered along the X axis to constitute a sample in the Grid resolution field Click OK when you are done setting up your scan parameters Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to the Magnifi application Click Cancel to discard all the modifications that you made Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Enabling Disabling Channels Before performing acquisitions you might want to select specific channels For this you need to know how to enable and disable channels To disable selected channels 1 From the Settings menu select Acquisition Setup gt Enable Disable Channels or click the Enable disable channels button in the Acquisition Setup toolbar The Enable Disable Channels window appears Figure 3 83 The Enable Disable Channels window Channel Name Channel Name TIFSQ0A12 TIFSQ0A13 TIFS00A14 TIFS00A15 TIFS00A16 TIFS00A17 TIFS00A18 TIFeQ0A02 T1F8Q0A03 TIFS00A04 TIF amp 00A05 TIF amp 00A06 TIFS00A07 TIF amp 00A08 T1F amp 00A05 T1F800A10 T1F800A11 TIFSQ0A22 TIFS00A23 TIFS00A24 TIFS00A25 TIFS00A26 TIFS00A27 TIF800A28 i 2 Inthe Enabled list select the channels to disable To select one channel click the channel To select contiguous channels in the list click one channel press the SHIFT key and click the last channel that you want to select All channels between the first and last selected become selected as well
184. hanges amplitude scale of both axes Signal area Right click E Opens a contextual menu Inside rectangle alarm Left click drag d Moves the alarm zone zone On border of rectangle Left click drag alarm zone Inside pie alarm zone Left click drag On border of pie alarm Left click drag zone A Increases decreases the size of the zone Rotates the alarm zone Increases decreases the size of the zone Appendix D Table D 2 Mouse and keyboard functions continued 329 Arrow to the right Signal trace Blue cursors Signal trace Anywhere Frequency Coil Link views Link views Link views rotation rotation rotation rotation In Lissajous Views Left click Left click Left click Left click Left click drag Left click drag Right click Space bar Left click Right click Left click Right click Left click Right click Middle click Left click Right click Middle click Left click vertical drag E Displays measurement values in the expanded strip chart title bar It activates the title bar of the expanded strip chart Toggles between 0 and 180 Adds the indication to the analysis report Opens and closes a list of indication codes Move the signal trace up and down inside the expanded strip chart Increases or decreases the area covered inside the cursors Move the blue cursors to the mouse position Center da
185. hat will be assigned to an indication when you click it Opens a drop down list of available indication codes For more information on indication codes see Managing Indication Codes on page 197 Indicates the size of a signal based on a sizing curve A value is indicated only if a sizing curve is defined for the displayed channel or C scan Indicates the measured angle of the signal inside the measurement brackets The default measurement mode is defined in the preferences see Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Methods on page 74 Indicates the measured amplitude of the signal inside the measurement brackets The default measurement mode is defined in the preferences see Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Methods on page 74 Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Voltage Plane View Figure 1 17 Voltage plane view a tae Management bar iid 15 000 V Voltage plane 40 S OD 24 OD 31 T O0 Measurement bar Managing Layouts 18 Elements of a Voltage Plane View All voltage planes are presented the same way with the same elements as displayed below Figure 1 18 The voltage plane management bar Table 1 4 Description of voltage plane management bar items Channel list Channel label Data type Scale Frequency Coil Link Gives you access to the list of available channels For more information see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78
186. hat you want to use see page 155 3 Inthe Phase section a Enter the angle in degrees at which you want to set the reference signal b Inthe Reference drop down list select the calibration point on which to base this modified phase c Inthe Measurement method drop down list select the measurement method that you want to use see page 155 Managing C scans 168 4 In the Orientation section optional a Enter the approximate angle in degrees at which the reference signal should be located b Inthe Reference drop down list select the calibration point on which to base this modified orientation 5 Inthe Scaling axis drop down list select the axis along which the scaling will be performed Circ or Axial or X or Y depending on scan parameters 6 If analyzing signals obtained from surface inspection arrays a Check the Single gain phase box to apply a single gain and phase to all channels or leave the box unchecked to allow individual adjustment of each probe element b Check the Assisted array calibration box to help in the determination of the direction of the measurements vector 7 Click OK The Scale process is configured Configuring the Median Filter Process The Median filter process which is mostly used in ECA inspections is a statistical filter based on the median value calculated on a certain number of samples a k a the window It can behave as either a low or high pass filter with the particulari
187. he type of scan that you need to perform Here is a list of scan types supported by with rotating probes note also used when performing IRIS inspections Maenifi Linear single axis with bobbin probes Tube bore with array probes with rotating array probes 2D surface raster single channel single pass array probe raster array probe polar array polar raster Scan parameters are set from the Scan Parameters window that appears when selecting Scan Parameters from the Settings menu or when double clicking Scan parameters in the Setup tab Figure 3 31 Accessing the scan parameters m m Magnifi 3 3B1T6 Default setup File View Operation Layouts STI Hel g J Preferences y Setup re oo CAU defau Acquisition Setup Ys C scans Setup section Codes Automati Calibration Points Scan pa Sizing cu C scan Processe Sizing Curves Landmarks Materials Application Wizard amp Probe Database Setup Wizard gt Automated Sequence m z uj Magnifi 3 3B1T6 Default setup File View Settings Operation La e St ue wE Setup Acquis ra os CAU default magsetup Qa Setup vV Automatic recording Sizing curves C scan Processed channels Important C scans are not automatically updated when modifying scan parameters Whenever Figure 3 32 C scan Reload Warning you make changes that migh
188. he Frequency kHz section type a value for each frequency that you want to use For systems with multiplexed frequencies simultaneous injection the actual frequency used may vary slightly from what is requested because the system may need to alter the frequency slightly to avoid noise inducing harmonics 4 Inthe Display section select whether to display and configure signals sent to the probe in volts Amplitude or in degrees Phase Also select whether you want to display the requested Requested or real Actual value sent to the probe by the system Note The name of the Phase deg section in Figure C 7 depends on your selection at the previous step Creating a Setup for the Test Unit 318 Important In the Phase deg Amplitude V section click the row F1 F2 in the Frequency kHz section and column TS1 TS2 headers to select the frequencies and time slots to which you want to apply a specific value You can also quickly select all the time slots and frequencies by clicking Select All in the Fill tool section In the Fill selected time slots with text box of the Fill tool section type the value that you want to send to the probe Click Fill This sets up the amplitude or phase sent to the boxes selected at step 5 The maximum total value for one column cannot exceed 10 V However any combination of values is allowed as long as it remains within the 10 V limit If necessary to make sure that indication
189. he Report window clicking Edit after selecting a line also opens the Edit Defect window 3 If necessary scroll in the window to find the value that you want to edit and double click it The value becomes editable 4 Change the value as needed For all numerical values and most text values type in the new value For some text values a drop down list appears select a new value from it 5 Press ENTER or click outside the text box The modification is complete 6 Click OK to close the window For Multiple Entries Simultaneously If you want to apply a single value to multiple report entries you can change all those report entries at once Note This can only be done on displayed entries To do so 1 From the Report window or the report status select all the entries that you want to edit Managing Reports 281 282 To select contiguous entries in the list click one entry press the SHIFT key and click the last entry that you want to select All entries between the first and last selected become selected as well To select non contiguous entries in the list press the CTRL key while clicking on all the entries that you want to select 2 Right click the last selected entry A contextual menu appears Figure 5 31 Selecting multiple entries to edit Index Row Column v Deg Code Channef C Scan LME Y pos Offse File name DM VM Yieng 2 0 0 7 53 21 test jung Cec 0 000 ECA
190. hort groove S RFT Flat Bottom Hole RFT Name Short groove Units Percentage sf Report as remaining wall Measure from Channel R_COIL1 F1 Calibrated using measurement Peak to Peak Parameters Input measurement Phase Best Fit Polynomial 6 Once you are done click the Curve tab The Curve page appears Note Jf you selected an invalid curve shape in step 4 or if the curve has not been calibrated yet the word INVALID appears instead of a curve on the Curve page Setting Up Sizing Curves 206 Figure 3 149 Channel curve definition for calibration points ECT technology dual slope curve eeo O OOOO O O O ASME DIF F90 ECT ASME DIF_MIX ECT ASME_ABS F90 ECT 48 67 Phase degree Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 207 Figure 3 150 Channel curve definition for calibration points RFT technology linear slope 1 Sng one Cr S seeeseeeseeesesesseesseesseseseosseeseeoseesseessseseeessesseeessesesesesessseesseeseeeseesssesseesssesssesseesssssseessy i Hat Bottom Hole REFI gt aa Aasesesessesesesssest 88 106 Phase degree 7 Click Select The Select Calibration Point window appears Figure 3 151 The Select Calibration Point window Setting Up Sizing Curves 208 8 Select all calibration points required to create a sizing curve and click OK Selected points will be grouped and sorted at
191. i 23 Elements of an A scan All A scans are presented the same way with the same elements as displayed below Figure 1 23 The A scan view management 1 2 3 4 5 FWp 9 81mm FWt6614ns BWp 1250mm BWt 7089ns WT 2 69mm WL 1015 PDt 21 55mm_AR 5 it bean Duratipn 34 23 mm Glin 23 0 dB Tensijn 200 000 Vv Input Filler 4 5 24 MHz v Rectification Yes y Sinoothing Filter 7 5 MHz X Table 1 7 Description of A scan view items 1 Information field Allows you to select the information fields that you want to display above customization button the A scan for more information see Configuring Information Fields on page 59 2 Information fields Information fields giving specific data that you want to monitor in real time for more information see Configuring Information Fields on page 59 3 Backwall button Zooms the A scan time scale to show only the front wall and backwall echoes 4 View Envelope button Keeps the maximum values of each A scan 5 Display Hide A scan When the A scan is displayed this button points down indicating that clicking on it will send it at the bottom of the screen hide whereas when it points up it indicates that the A scan is hidden and that clicking it will bring up the A scan 6 General tab Allows you to configure general A scan parameters see Configuring A scan View Parameters on page 57 7 Gates tab Allows you to configure the detection gates see
192. i PP v PF Circ 0 0000 ECAEncirc PP VPP 70 500 ee ee VPP 3 0000 Circ Insert Entry vpp 2 0000 Circ Insert Copy of Entry VPP 1 5000 Edit Entry VPP 1 0000 Cire VPP 9 5000 Circ Edit multiple entries VPP 7 0000 Cire Delete Entry 1VPP 6 0000 Circ Delete All Entries VPP 0000 Cire IVPP 4 5000 Circ Print VPP 70 500 Circ VPP 3 0000 Circ pala VPP 2 0000 Circ Display profiles Standard Circ Copy Cofitent to Clipboard Generic ai Sort Hx Bop Cire Circ ee rat eee er Saved with setup Circ 0 0000 ECA Encirc PP VPP roo Circ 0 0000 ECAEncirc PP VPP 4 5000 Circ 0 0000 ECAEncirc PP VPP 70 500 CF1 0 0000 ECA Axial PP V PP 282 54 4 In the Display profiles sub menu select one of the following options Standard columns displayed are relevant to general tube inspections Generic columns displayed are more relevant to array inspections Hx Bop columns displayed are similar to the Standard profile but have no information on analysts 5 Once the report profile is displayed you can customize it as explained in the next section From Scratch To do so 1 Select Edit Report from the Operation menu or click Edit report from the Analysis toolbar The Report window opens and the path to the file is indicated in the title bar Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data Figure 5 18 The Report window 273 Code test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 t
193. ic recording Scan parameters Sizing curves C scan Processed channels Manaaa Ajat 2077 31T6 Default setup tings Layouts Special Help l E Y Setup mode Acquisition mod pe Anahy cquisition mode Analysis mode gsetup amp Disconnect from Instrument ording 2a Start F2 Ly E Balancing F6 annels gp System Calibration gq Large Acquisition Window Edit Report 1 Create Note Screen Capture T Previous Indication F7 t Next Indication F8 C scan Palette Ga Automatic Measurements Directories T Data starts appearing in the different views as you scan Once you are done scanning click Stop from the Control bar select Stop from the Operation menu or press F2 again Data 1s processed as per your setup and then displayed For more information on data analysis see Analyzing amp Reporting Data on page 255 Performing Acquisitions in Setup Mode 228 Saving Data Normally data are saved in the directories associated with the inspection project in use You can however save data in another directory if you wish To do so 1 Select Save Data As from the File menu A Save Data window appears Figure 4 12 The Save Data window Save Data Directory C Users PS amson QTEC Documents M agnitiD ata amples w3 0 File name Browse Selection All Cursor selection Save Cancel 2 Enter a name f
194. ically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field c Ifyou chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use d If you chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested acquisition rate in the Requested field and the maximum acquisition rate in the Max acquisition rate field Depending on how the encoder is defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones you selected for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 78 4 In the C scan orientation section select the button representing the orientation that you want to use for C scans X and Y axes This only affects how data is displayed it has no effect on the actual scan Figure 3 60 The C scan orientation section C scan orientation LJ ol Al bt Configuring Scan Parameters 124 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 In the Single channel raster scan surface inspection section configure your basic scan parameters The Single channel raster scan surface inspection section Single channel raster scan surface inspection Get position from Encoder W Absolute Encoders Encoder trigger Panis Yanis Encoder Encoder r C scan a Inthe Get position from drop down lis
195. ideos _ ECT_Bobbin_4pins _ ECT_Bobbin_41pins _ NFT_Standard 20 _ RFT_DualDriver_1F 2012 0 _ RFT_DualDriver_2F 20 _ RFT_SingleDriver_1F 20 3 45 _ RFT_SingleDriver_2F 2012 05 16 13 45 File name Tm Arrange by Folder e folder e folder MAGSETU e 365 KB MAGSETU E 311 KB MAGSETU 280 KB MAGSETL e 239 KB MAGSETU z 289 KB MAGSETU 230 KB MAGSETU 272 KB X Setup set magsetup v Cancel Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions Loading Recently Used Setup Files If you recently used a setup file you can quickly access it by selecting it from the Recent Files item in the File menu Figure 4 4 Selecting a recent file View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help Save Setup and Edit Properties New 48 S aBa Lonia _ asri aT lori a Save Setup aaa e ee ee ee Save Setup As Ctrl Shift S r j w orri lt ee ee rT View Setup Properties Load Data ia Save Data As Create Inspection Project Manage Inspection Project Recent Files C Users PSAMSO 1 QTE AppData Local Temp Magnifi default magsetup ABS Fl ca us us Eat Ake F4 C Users psamson QTEC Documents Magnifi Setup RFT_DualDriver_2F magsetup x gt Converting Legacy Acquisition Setup Files to Ectane Files To use a TC7700 or MS5800 acquisition setup with an Ectane instrumen
196. ilable for use on another workstation It is important to send the release request to an Eddyfi representative as soon as possible The file was created in C Users PSamson QTEC Documents Maanifi Activation Release D65D3B95 7901 4C13 8698 9812B658085D txt Copy file as text Click Send file by email An email is automatically created and properly formatted from your default email software Send this email as is without changing the email s content Close the Release Software License window Upgrading Software License Keys 308 Requesting New License Keys To request a new software license key 1 Start Magnifi Since you must have released the software license prior to upgrading to a new one the License Validation Failure window appears Figure B 7 The License Validation Failure window License Validation ie OX Magnifi cannot run without a valid licence Please make sure that you have a valid licence to run the software lf you have a valid hardware key please insert it ina USB port on your workstation and click Retry lf you need to manage Magnifi licences please click Manage lf you want to save your setup and quit the application please click Exit An instrument can serve as a basic hardware key To use your instrument as such click Connect Retry Exit Manage 2 Click Manage The License Information window appears 3 Expand the Software section Appendix B 309 Figure B 8 Th
197. imum probe speed in the Max probe speed field Figure 3 36 The Acquisition rate section Encoder selected Note Acquisition rate Sampling clack Encoder 1 Requested 2 000000 smpl mm Actual 2000 Hz Max probe speed 1000 mm s Depending on how the encoder was defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones selected for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 75 4 In the Linear single axis scan no available C scan section configure your basic scan parameters Figure 3 37 The Linear single axis scan no available C scan section Linear single asis scan no available C scar Get position from Acquisition clack T Encodertigger Probe speed FOO 000 mms Acquisition density 1 6000 ampl mm Acquisition resolution 0 6250 mm smpl a Inthe Get position from drop down list select what device will provide probe positions The devices shown in the list depend on the selection made in step 3 If you selected Internal clock in step 3 you can choose from Acquisition clock default value Non standard clock or Encoder If you selected External clock or a preset encoder in step 3 you can only select Encoder b When selecting Encoder from the Get position from drop down list you must select the proper encoder in the Encoder trigger drop down list c Enter the estimated probe speed in the Probe speed field If you selected
198. indow by clicking on the button associated with the code For more information on managing indication codes see Adding Indication Codes on page 197 Figure 5 26 Buttons on the Indication codes toolbar w P F P Note Clicking on the No Indication button green check mark adds this code to the report and automatically loads the next file Deleting Report Entries While performing a visual analysis of the acquired data you might need to delete entries from a report Depending on the report and on where you are in the application you can delete report entries in one of two ways from the Report window from the Report status From the Report Window To delete entries from the Report window 1 With a data file loaded select Edit Report from the Operation menu or click Edit report from the Analysis toolbar The Report window appears Figure 5 27 The Report window D iont Uien Samon QTEC Decuments Magni Dats Report and Deg et jung Cir ICA Lnorcing 176400 7 oor mm ari 60000 40000 6 0000 ood test pung Circ ICA ncrciing 172900 14400 mm 362 0 1 2000 Je 2i men at wees Copy Dette Lee AJ La boat Part Upton Epon hd Heades m a 2 Click Delete to delete the last entry in the report or Delete All to delete all entries from a report Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 279 From the Report Status To delete entries from the report status B 1 With a data file loaded click Sh
199. information fields You can modify the measured data by manually moving the various brackets if necessary Figure 5 13 Selecting data in IRIS inspections Brackets Measured data Measuring Indications 268 Using Screen Captures Magnifi comes with a tool that allows you to take screen captures of your application directly from within the application itself You can save those screen captures to add in reports or print them directly from Magnifi Making Screen Captures To make a screen capture 1 From the Operation menu select Screen Capture The Screen Capture window appears Figure 5 14 The Screen Capture window Screen Capture Save Edt Display Capture Note The screen capture tool is only compatible with Windows 7 Basic color schemes The workstation is automatically placed in a compatible color scheme whenever the screen capture tool is selected It reverts to the original color scheme once you close the screen capture tool 2 From the Capture menu select the screen element that you want to capture Screen captures the entire screen without further operations Window captures the window or window element on which you click Rectangle captures a rectangular area that you select 3 If you selected Window or Rectangle make your selection on the screen The selected screen capture appears as a preview in the Screen Capture window Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 269 Saving Scr
200. inish The user probe is added in the Probe Manager window and you can now select it for use in the future Note Jf you loaded a setup containing information about a proprietary probe it is automatically added to the Probe Manager s list as a user probe Removing Probes Note Official probes available in the Eddyfi database cannot be removed the red X is inactive To remove a user probe simply click the red X at the extreme right of the list in the Probe Manager Modifying Probes To modify a user probe 1 2 3 Select the user probe from the Probe Manager s list Click Edit The Probe Wizard appears where you can make modifications to the selected probe parameters When you are done making modifications click Finish The modifications are saved Managing Probes 194 Figure 3 139 Probe Manager action buttons lypical robe lypical Detni single kow Probe TypicalProbe Typical Tube Array Probe Dp te New Edit W Duplicate E Import Export Update amp Probe Models Duplicating Probes Note Since Magnifi does not allow you to modify an existing official Eddyfi probe if you want to modify one of these probes you have to duplicate it first To do so 1 Select an existing probe official or user 2 Click Duplicate The Probe Wizard starts and you can immediately modify parameters 3 Click Finish when you are done The duplicated probe appears in
201. ion Output channel name Land Landmark Label Encoder Range 2 All landmark types defined in the landmark table see page 180 appear in the list Default values are set to Waveform positive absolute signal pictogram Component Vertical Threshold 10000 this value is set so that no detection is performed unless this value is modified or adjusted automatically through calibration The waveform component threshold and peak to peak distance values for differential waveforms correspond to the minimum criteria required for automatic detection You can set each value manually Setting Up Processed Channels 158 3 Select when the detection should be performed Analysis At the acquisition stop the first and last landmark are detected Both these landmarks are used to evaluate the inspection speed which in turn will allow you to locate intermediate landmarks This is the preferred method when all defined landmarks are not necessarily found in the tube Acquisition Landmarks are detected during the acquisition by using the order and position defined in the landmark table see page 180 The software estimates positions by using the inspection speed defined in the scan parameters This is the preferred method when the inspection speed can vary greatly from one tube to another or even within the same tube as the detection algorithm accepts significant positioning errors 4 Define the ac
202. ion field Gn mm or in depending on preferences Enter the gain to apply in the Gain field Enter the excitation voltage in the Tension field Select an input filter from the Input Filter drop down list Choose to apply signal rectification or not in the Rectification drop down list Select your smoothing filter in the Smoothing Filter drop down list 79 gt 2 N To setup A scan gate parameters Figure 1 69 Gates A scan view parameters Gecccvcsccsccssscccen General Gates Start Length Level Pin 0 00 0 00 0 Front wall 0 00 0 00 0 Back wall 0 00 0 00 0 Level relative to Front wall Delay Slope TGC 0 00 mm 0 00 dB us 1 Enter the Start Length and Level for the pin front wall and back wall If you want all levels to be relative to the front wall check the Level relative to Front wall box 2 Enter the delay and slope of the TGC in the appropriate fields Managing Views 58 Configuring Projection Views Projection views are used with the IRIS inspection technique only They represent the wall thickness of the tube along the different axes In Magnifi you can configure parameters that apply to each projection view individually To do so 1 Right click a displayed projection view A contextual menu appears Figure 1 70 Projection view contextual menu IA 750 0 mm dC 180 0 deg Zoom Out Best Fit ee ENER Properties 2 Click Properties The Properties dialog box for this
203. ir right Adds a line of management tools to change the parameters of the displayed 3D C scan In standard C scans this button is replaced with a Display navigation panel button that gives you access to controls for moving between indications Allows you to display hide the C scan color palette For more information see Customizing Color Schemes on page 41 Indicates whether the vertical or horizontal component of the data is displayed Indicates the frequency of the displayed data For more information on frequencies see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the coil to which belongs the displayed data For more information on coil numbers see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Allows you to link views For more information see Linking Views on page 61 26 Polar Scans Magnifi offers two types of polar scans Standard 3D Figure 1 26 Standard polar scan left and 3D polar scan right LIET FFE a DEE e E te ee Fae Dk E zara Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Elements of a Polar Scan All polar scans 8D and standard are presented the same way with the same elements as displayed below Figure 1 27 The 3D and standard polar scan management bar 1 2 Ga N IMP 200 1 abs 4 5 6 7 365 yx 1 000 Cl eS 4 p 0S b al Table 1 9 Description of 3D and standard polar scan management bar items 1 Channel C scan
204. is configured Setting Up Processed Channels 156 Editing the Voltage Plane Processing Unit Voltage Plane The Voltage Plane processing unit is used only with absolute signals in RFT mode It allows the system to rotate translate and scale the signal at the nominal position in the voltage plane view To configure the Voltage Plane processing unit 1 Double click the Voltage Plane processing unit icon The Voltage Plane dialog box appears Figure 3 100 Configuring the Voltage Plane processing unit Note Note r Voltage Plane Current Nominal ChannelName Rotation Gai OffsetX OffsetY Rotation Gai OffsetX OffsetY Channel List Deg ah Volts Volts Deg sr Volts Volts R_ABS F1 32 6 0 675 1 23 0 78 33 1 0 337 2 56 1 62 Apply To All v Linked DPScale Process Scale v Cancel Reset Nominal All data shown under Current applies to the actual calibration and all data shown under Nominal applies to the recorded nominal point 2 From the Linked DPScale Process drop down list select whether you want to link the voltage plane to a scale process Each time a normalization is done in the voltage plane the same rotation and gain are applied to the linked Scale processing unit 3 For the previous action to become effective you must select Apply To All in the Channel List drop down list If you click Reset Nominal all values under the Nominal col
205. is not required Since there is no off state for this feature select the highest available value 1 MHz if you want to make sure that counter data is not affected d Inthe Resolution text box type the encoder resolution This information is usually found in the encoder specifications e Inthe Preset text box type the value in steps that is used to preset the encoder see step b above f On the Units list select the unit type corresponding to the encoder resolution value that you typed in the Resolution text box 5 Next to the Preset button select the check box next to the number corresponding to the encoder that you want to preset 6 Click Preset to set the selected encoder to the value entered in the Preset text box see step 4e above Creating a Setup for the Test Unit 322 Defining Toptour Channel Parameters Once the encoder parameters are defined you can specify more precise parameters for the toptour channel To do so 1 Inthe Name text box enter the name of the toptour channel that will be created 2 Check the Activate box to activate the newly created toptour channel 3 In the Filter drop down list select the toptour channel low pass filter frequency used for signal debouncing 4 Inthe Value text box enter the amount of voltage to be sent to the probe 5 In the Divider text box enter the number of signals to be sent from the probe on each rotation Once all these parameters are set clo
206. is only affects how data is displayed is has no effect on the scan itself The C scan orientation section al LF C scan orientation al Configuring Scan Parameters 134 5 Inthe Polar array scan section configure your basic scan parameters Figure 3 76 The Polar array scan section Note Polar array scan Get position from Encoder Absolute Encoders rte Encoder trigger Enc Theta C scan a Inthe Get position from drop down list select what device will provide probe positions The list of available devices depends on the selection made previously in the Sampling clock drop down list If you selected Internal clock or External clock from the Sampling clock drop down list the following choices are available Encoder Non standard clock Acquisition clock If you selected a preset encoder in the Sampling clock drop down list only Encoder is available b Ifyou selected Acquisition clock from the Get position from drop down list go to step 6 If you selected Non standard clock from the Get position from drop down list enter the speed at which the probe part will move along the X axis in the Probe part speed field If you selected Encoder from the Get position from drop down list select the encoder that corresponds to the angular path in the Encoder trigger drop down list Check the Absolute Encoders box if necessary This option allows you to use negative and positive position values
207. itle bar informs you of the software version that you are running and the setup in use Figure 1 3 The title and menu bars Software Setup ida in use Magnifi 3 38178 Default setup lt Title bar File View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help lt Menu bar ae B to se R_COL1F1 Setup Acquis Analysis CAU default magsetup Understanding the User Interface a Toolbars Underneath the menu bar is the default toolbar area where toolbars appear when you select them on the View menu The available toolbars are General e C scan Setup Wizard Analysis Acquisition Setup Acquisition Layout Indication codes Acquisition Notepad see Control and Info Bars on page 5 Functions performed from these toolbars are explained in context throughout this documentation Figure 1 4 The toolbars General C scan Setup Wizard Analysis Acquisition Acquisition Setup Layout Indication Codes Magee 2 ELTE Ertan mia oe Pir al mai E amp a Cemte Lepra oap E i ipeni Ha tug yh Hng F E 18E BEE ee Another toolbar that is available from the View menu is the Acquisition Notepad By default this toolbar does not appear in the toolbar area and is explained in more detail in the next section Status Bar The status bar is found in the lower part of the display It gives most of the information given
208. l column titles currently displayed in the report and the Available columns list contains all columns titles available for reporting 4 To add columns to the report select a column title in the Available columns list and Click Insert gt gt to add the column title at the beginning of the list of columns visible in the report or Click Add gt gt to add the column title at the end of the list of visible of columns visible in the report or Click Add All gt gt to add all available columns to the list of columns visible in the report 5 To remove columns from the report select a column title from the Visible columns list and Click lt lt Remove to remove the column from the report or Click lt lt Remove All to remove all columns from the report Managing Reports 274 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 The Columns tab of the Options window Options General Columns Sort Available columns Visible columns Column Acq unit level Analyst Analyst type Arc Lenath Axis Channel in C Scan Chord Column Comment Datum X Datum Y Depth DM v Column Index O V Deg Code Channel C Scan File name X pos X leng X axis units Y pos Y leng Y axis units H HH HH HH HH HH H HH o o Insert gt gt Add gt gt Add All gt gt lt lt Remove All lt lt Remove Column description Unique Auto Increment number that defines this entry
209. lators found in the test unit d The PIM identification info box indicates the PIM probe interface module found in the test unit e Inthe Board group box the Board number text box allows you to select the number of the board for which you need information The Software version info box indicates the version of the software inside the acquisition board The Piggyback info box indicates if a piggyback board is there or not The Ethernet info box indicates the acquisition board Ethernet address The Date info box indicates the creation date of the software version inside the acquisition board The Board ID info box indicates the serial number of the selected acquisition board The Main info box indicates the state of the master EC Acquisition board The Piggyback ID info box indicates the serial number of the piggyback board The TCP IP info box indicates the IP address of the acquisition board 4 In the General sub section a The Loading info box indicates the state of the test unit loading sequence and if there were anomalies once loading is finished b The Equipment state info box indicates the type of operation currently handled by the test unit INIT initialization NORMAL CFG configuration BALANCE CAL calibration DIAG diagnostic ACQ acquisition c The Balancing info box indicates the state of the test unit balancing sequence and if there were anomalies once balancing is done d The Warm up info box indicates the test unit w
210. list 2 Channel C scan name 3 Channel C scan label 4 3D polar scan values 3D polar scans only 5 3D polar scan tools button 3D polar scan only 6 Color Palette 7 Axis 8 Frequency 9 Coil 10 Link Managing Layouts Gives you access to the list of available channels or C scans For more information see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the name of the channel or C scan For more information on naming channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the label given to a channel For more information on labeling channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Allows you to view the values applied to the rotation of a 3D polar scan and to modify a few of them values with up down arrows to their right Adds a line of management tools to change the parameters of the displayed 3D polar scan In standard polar scans this button is replaced with a Display navigation panel button that gives you access to controls for moving between indications Allows you to display hide the polar scan color palette For more information see Customizing Color Schemes on page 41 Indicates whether the vertical or horizontal component of the data is displayed Indicates the frequency of the displayed data For more information on frequencies see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicate
211. lly the value entered in this field is the total size of the piece under test d By default the display resolution on the axial axis is calculated automatically If the value indicated is not the one that you expected uncheck the Automatic axial display resolution box This activates the Display resolution field under the Axial axis column Enter the required resolution in that field 9 Click OK when you are done setting up your scan parameters Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to the Magnifi application Click Cancel to discard all the modifications that you made Configuring Scan Parameters 118 For Tube Bore Scans with Rotating Array Probes To set up scan parameters for tube bore scans with rotating array probes 1 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings menu The Scan Parameters window appears Figure 3 52 The Scan Parameters window for tube bore scans with rotating array probes Scan type Acquisition rate Linear single axis scan bobbin Sampling clack Internal clock Tube bore Requested 4000 0000 Hz C Rotating probe A Aira probe Actual 4000 Hz Rotating array probe 2D surface scan C scan orientation 6 Single channel raster scan y O Single pass array probe x F jm G Array probe raster scan 6 Polar array scan Polar raster scan Tubebore inspection with a rotating array probe Get position from Cire and axial encoders W
212. lute Transmit Receive vV v ABS TR Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg i me S 0 0 x Cancel lt lt Back 1 Enter the number of coils in your probe in the Coil quantity field 2 Select the required spacing between poles in the Pole spacing drop down list 3 Select the proper impedance bridge from the drop down list in the Impedance Bridge subsection 4 Check the Is circular box if your orthogonal probe is circular 5 Enter the required gain in the Gain field 6 Enter a channel prefix in the Channel prefix field The resulting channel name is indicated in the Resulting Channel Name field 7 To properly protect the probe enter the minimum frequency and maximum amplitude allowed in the Minimum frequency allowed and Maximum amplitude allowed fields of the Probe Protection section 8 To enable channel groups check the Differential Absolute and or Transmit Receive box es in the Channel Groups section You can also assign prefixes to these channel groups in the Prefix fields under the appropriate column 9 Enter the frequency amplitude and phase for each channel group that you need To add channel groups click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups section This adds a new line of data maximum of four under the first where you can also enter the proper frequency amplitude and phase 10 Once you are done entering the topology window click Finish Your Ectane is now properly co
213. ly create an exact copy of an existing group a copy that you can modify and rename afterwards To duplicate an existing group 1 In the Data Processing window select the tab of the group that you want to duplicate 2 Click Clone current group A new group tab appears displaying the exact content of the previously selected tab 3 If necessary rename the group and modify its parameters Renaming Groups By default the name of a newly created group is Group n where n is an incremental sequential number To change that name to a more meaningful or useful name click Rename current group The name of the tab becomes editable and you can enter a new name Figure 3 88 Renaming a group Cancel Apply Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 145 Activating Deactivating Groups You do not have to remove a group to stop using it You can simply deactivate it This keeps the group configuration intact but makes the group unavailable for signal processing To deactivate a group 1 Select the active group that you want to deactivate 2 Click Activate deactivate the current group The mark in the group check box disappears and the back of the tab becomes gray Figure 3 89 A deactivated group i g Data Processing To activate a group follow the previous procedure but select a deactivated group first A mark will appear in the group check
214. me of a new one newly entered references will be added to the Calibration Points list Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 153 3 Inthe Number of coefficients section select the number of coefficients applied to the signals Note ddyfi suggests applying four coefficients The higher the number of coefficients applied the more effective the signal removal You should use less coefficients only if the signals that you want to keep become too distorted 4 Click Add The Add New Mix dialog box appears Figure 3 98 The Add New Mix dialog box Add New Mix Available channels Add Add Remove Remove Insert Inzert Channel 1 Channel 2 R_0180 R_ES0 Cancel Cancel 5 From the Available channels list click a channel that you want to use asa base channel 6 Click the Add button on the left hand side to move the selected channel in the Channel 1 list 7 From the Available channels list click the channel that you want to subtract from the channel that you just added to the Channel 1 list 8 Click the Add button on the right hand side to move the selected channel in the Channel 2 list Setting Up Processed Channels 154 9 If necessary repeat steps 5 to 8 until all the mixes are complete Note Data from channels in the Channel 2 column are subtracted from the data from the adjacent channels in the Channel 1 column i e data for the first channel in the Channel 2 list is subtracte
215. ment ierwdeta Saf SoftwareTecam iervdats Saf ApplicetionTeam snd Saf Blectron c eredata E Sgt Softwareirchive verde Git Mechanical sredsta 1 GA SoftwareProducts Msn g GA Client erecta Oc G PrublicShare Vusrvdista gh Quality Vsrvdate Ce gh Transfer Wisrwdata T GA Production ueredata lL _ File rare Save at hype C sean template uest a 2 Hede Fedders Documents library Includes 2 locates x Name d Blocs netes Gnenote me BrP acetic A ta di Fichiers Gutieok Ue Legit Ji Magaii di Mes fichiers repus di micresoft d Seenned Documents i Snagit Ui Snagh Stamps Anenge byr Dair modfedd A 1118 IETA 011 200 Ea A N 28 ee 2011 D0 28 Se13 2010 1000 1434 M11 9 14 a 1 210 09 08 12 55 2011 eb os 1555 Sunhy Dexcarrenn fs OK Cancel Folder 7 4 Browse to the directory where you want to export the C scan template file cst and click Save The cst file is saved in the selected directory Managing C scans 176 Configuring C scan Views When displaying a C scan view in a layout you can choose to overlay a grid on top of the C scan and you can also decide of the scale applied to the C scan Displaying a grid can help you separate channels more easily among other things and changing the scale can modify the amount of scrolling that you do when viewing a C scan To configure C scan views 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You ca
216. mpling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate is controlled by an internal clock an external clock or a preset encoder b Ifyou chose Internal clock enter the acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field c Ifyou chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use d If you chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested acquisition rate in the Requested field and the maximum acquisition rate in the Max acquisition rate field Note Depending on how the encoder is defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones you selected for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 73 4 In the C scan orientation section select the button representing the orientation that you want to use for C scans X and Y axes This only affects how data is displayed is has no effect on the scan itself Figure 3 65 The C scan orientation section C scan orientation al Ed b Chapter 3 Pr
217. n on page 78 Indicates the coil to which belongs the displayed data For more information on coil numbers see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Allows you to link views For more information see Linking Views on page 61 14 Lissajous Figure 1 14 Lissajous for cre lll Management bar me 9 Channel name 4cF1N07 Lissajous Cursor data point 18500 CDE SE Se Measurement bar Measurement brackets Mini strip area Data selection cursor Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Elements of a Lissajous All Lissajous are presented the same way with the same elements as displayed below Figure 1 15 The Lissajous management bar Table 1 2 Description of Lissajous management bar items Managing Layouts Channel C scan list Channel C scan name Channel C scan label Data type Scale Rotation Frequency Coil Link Gives you access to the list of available channels or C scans For more information see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the name of the channel or C scan For more information on naming channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the label given to a channel For more information on labeling channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the type of data displayed C scan X or Y com
218. n also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Click the Display tab Figure 3 122 The Display tab Preferences K Views color scheme Strip Chart Current scheme White Time Distance Background Vertical scale 10 000 Data Hardware alarms Indication Saving zones Display Direction Up Link C scan cursor with channel Auto Tools Lissajous General display preferences Wamings Rotation angle mark V Display null mark 7 Enable Detection zone vV Display red dot at center Hide rotation number vV Display measurement vector ama V Display mini strip charts Name splitting C scan Channel Type Prefix Display grid Horizontal Characters for prefix oe Vertical Characters for suffix an C scan acquisition default scale C scan Type x Display all no scrolling Characters for prefix 0 Specific scale Characters for suffix 3 In the C sean section check the Display grid box if you want to display a erid Once you check this box the Vertical and Horizontal text boxes become active Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Figure 3 123 The C scan section C scan Display grig Horizontal 0 0 deg Vertical 0 0 mm C scan acquisition default scale Display all no scrolling Specific scale 0 0 4 Enter the values for the horizontal and vertical size of the grid that you want to overlay on top of the C scan 5 Inthe C scan acquisition
219. n is removed from the list Managing C scans 172 Duplicating C scans To duplicate a C scan 1 With a data file open either select C scans from the Settings menu or double click C scan in the Setup tab The C scan Configuration window appears Figure 3 115 The C scan Configuration window 6 a C Scan Configuration C Scan CF1 Process CF1 New State Processing Type Details CF2 CF3 Delete Build from channel CF4 Rename Scale Duplicate Import Interpolation Export 2 In the C scan list on the left select the C scan to duplicate and click Duplicate A new C scan is added to the list with the name of the original to which a _n has been added where n is an incremental variable that starts at the lowest available integer For example in Figure 3 115 if duplicating the CF1 C scan a CF1_1 C scan is automatically added If you select CF 1 to duplicate it once more CF1_2 is created If CF1_1 1s subsequently deleted and CF1 is duplicated again it will create CF1_1 and not CF1_3 Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 173 Renaming G scans To rename a C scan 1 With a data file open either select C scans from the Settings menu or double click C scan in the Setup tab The C scan Configuration window appears Figure 3 116 The C scan Configuration window P a C Scan Configuration C Scan CF1 Process CF1 New State
220. n ja ita tate L pe ile ble maj w ja wn ja it ja itda hata ho hyo l ige iei ja wa ja ii ja ita Eper E pmr L Lu bile maj i ja wn ja hita hida belie hee ZEPE NS EREER See NER EEA bye ia ble printed Managing Reports BoHotdeocrieCcoeomwaoagdgdoCcrercroeanc d dwcoccdceGeogadcdoiccccOGhagacdcdc co amp D O ee ee O O O G O i i i i i a a a a a a i i a a a a a i i i j o a a a a o o o o a a a a a a i a Cams Dat WEP SaPP i WEP Waj FP Ono WEP HiPP bio YEP Hiart Goo VPP 343 PP oi VPP PARP Hi0 YFP W43 PP Hi0 WEP S600 PP bi VEP SPP ond WEP SPP Ooo VPP Sere pg YEP 363 FP Oto VPP HIHFPP 0 YFP HI2IPP ee WPP W2 PP ORO WPP HMSOPP ono WEP dias PP Oto VPP S038 FP Ooo WEP SPR one WEP pjt aio WEP HAPE i VPP W33 FP OSG VPP PPP Oe WPP H207PP qo WEP 1490 PP hi WEP HaSOPP i WFP Shas FP Oto WEP Se FP aio WEP iite Goo VPP I HFP Ooo VPP W3 PP Oe YFP HIFP Hi0 WEP HAGJPP bi VEP i FP gi WEP Warr ooo WEP papit io WEP teak FP Goo WFP So FP Ooo VPP EPP i0 VPP HLHFP ee Peien Y Fasten k Lenght Lengi E Bai iii vy wa ervey wa avn ii BAV oy Fiv thm wii aw Rain hee Bai i kar wa wim kar i 30 FNN E31 inl Ezi Fii Ezi BAP pJi Bari b i bald b i kni bar Bail bar ie we fie a hil um PE ROETE haahi aiii Bai 1 ktin wee ie we Pik we E Ha EIF ta EIF he kHH iii kHH 75 55 pede Wo ei Hi ei Ww kiam 30 EIF ie EIF he 285 286 Expor
221. n the list Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 245 This measurement will evaluate the wall thickness around the circumference at the cursor location and recalculate the material ultrasound velocity so that the average wall thickness matches the nominal wall thickness defined in the Application Wizard 8 Click Calibrate System calibration is performed based on the reference measurements taken 9 Click Close Figure 4 28 IRIS calibration m Magnifi 3 2B2 Setup from orignal data file C Users PSamson QTEC Documents Magnifi Data Samples V3 2 IRIS Cal Tube magdat File View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help FEL ORNETTE ANNEE v P P P Setup Acquis Analysis wy o w e m C Users PSams V3 2 amp t Filename S ECA Dovetail ECA Encircling 2 Calibration ECA Generic weld ECA Gereric ECA Helical kar ECA Polar Channel and Sizing Curves ECA Polar Raster Sizing Curves ECA Static Coan ECT_bobbin_4pins IRIS Cal Tube C scan and Sizing Curves RFT_DualDriver_1F o IRIS RFT_DualDriver_2F aiak g gt ProbeDelay Net WallThickness Param Value Y pos 750 mm Y smol 750 X sm l 62 ay 236 mm Y Lm NIA RPS 98 f WT 2 77 mm WL 0 1 ID 4 ID Calibrating Systems 246 Opening Inspection Projects Usually after installing your inspection equipment and establishing communication with it the first step to perform is to o
222. nate the location of the defect like with RFT applies to plates as well as tubes Unknown For reference Not used for sizing applies to plates as well as tubes Note In the Size fields the values entered are unit less The work unit is defined in the next step Figure 3 146 The Calibration Points page from the Sizing Curves Configuration window r IL Sizing Curves Configuration Calibration Points E aa Points tup calibration points used by sizing curves Short groove S RFT Flat Bottom Hole RFT Name Side Through mh OD OD OD Unknown KK XK XX Add Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish 2 Once all your calibration points are defined click Next gt gt Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Configuring Individual Sizing Curves Complete the channel definition for each calibration point The amount of information to configure depends on the inspection technology used The Name ID and Input measurement fields are already configured from a previous step in the wizard Figure 3 147 Channel parameter definitions for calibration points ECT technology a IL_ Sizing Curves Configuration N General Calibration Points ASME DIF F30 ECT El Definitions ASME DIF_MIX ECT T ASME_ABS F90 ECT Definition Curve Name ASME DIF F90 Units Percentage id Report as remaining wall
223. nce you have finished installing or updating the Magnifi software on your workstation as per the installation booklet that came in the program s box or from the procedure found in Reinstalling Magnifi on page 297 the program s icon appears on your desktop Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Note The Magnifi icon m Magnifi To start the program double click the program s icon or select the icon and press ENTER on your keyboard The program starts and the main window appears The Magnifi main window I cn Magee LNH eet ort Ae Ves Sethe Operon ait ipi heip egi ae shu E gt a G i C7 E eal LOD 0D EE a Ge Gd ie a el a Derd The first time that Magnifi is started on a newly installed workstation you will be asked to choose a default measurement mode ASME or EDF For more information see Setting Measurement Conventions on page 72 Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Understanding the User Interface Magnifi offers an improved more modern and effective display mode to interact with the user Keyboard shortcuts and mouse actions are more in line with the now usual Microsoft Windows standards In the following pages the basic elements of the Magnifi main window will be discussed Title and menu bars Status bar Toolbars Info and control bars Data display area Title and Menu Bars At the top of the window you find the title bar and menu bar The t
224. nd edit certain properties Viewing Properties To view properties 1 From the File menu select View Setup Properties The Setup Properties window appears Figure 3 9 The Setup Properties window a Setup Properties Owner s Name Owner s Initials Description Lock setup 2 From this window you can see the name and the initials of the setup s owner as well as a description of the setup and comments about it Editing Properties To edit setup properties 1 From the File menu select Save Setup and Edit Properties The Setup Properties window appears see Figure 38 9 All fields shown in Figure 3 9 are editable 2 Enter the relevant information in each field 3 Click OK The setup properties are saved Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups Before configuring your scan parameters you must configure the hardware that will use them The following pages explain how to configure your hardware to perform acquisitions Important Magnifi also imports existing MS5800 and TC7700 setups For more information on using these test units with Magnifi see Operating TC7700 amp MS5800 on page 311 Configuring an acquisition setup for the Ectane instrument is performed through a setup wizard that guides you step by step in entering all the relevant information regarding your setup The following pages explain the various steps
225. nfigured Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups Configuring Single Driver Topologies To configure single driver topologies Figure 3 22 Single driver topology parameters oS gt m Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders General El Topologies Single Driver T1 Single Driver T1 Parameters for the selected topology Coil quantity 34 Channe Groups Axial Transversal Pole spacing Enabled v v Is circular Prefix A F Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg Gain 23 dB 500 2 50 x 0 0 Channel prefix T1 Resulting Channel Name T1F1T001 Probe Protection Minimum frequency allowed 100 000 kHz Maximum amplitude allowed 8 00 V Cancel lt Back _ Enter the number of coils in your probe in the Coil quantity field Select the required spacing between poles in the Pole spacing drop down list Check the Is circular box if your X probe is circular Enter the required gain in the Gain field Enter a channel prefix in the Channel prefix field The resulting channel name is indicated in the Resulting Channel Name field To properly protect the probe enter the minimum frequency and maximum amplitude allowed in the Minimum frequency allowed and Maximum amplitude allowed fields of the Probe Protection section To enable channel groups check the Axial and or Transversal box es in the Channel Groups section You can also assign prefixes to these channel groups in
226. ng Clear Lissajous from the Operation menu or by pressing F5 4 Once you are done scanning click Stop from the Control bar select Stop from the Operation menu or press F2 again Data is processed as per your setup and then displayed To start a new acquisition click Next from the Acquis tab of the Control bar or press F4 and start recording the next file in the list Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 251 Repeat steps 8 to 5 until all your acquisitions are performed Data are saved automatically in the proper inspection project directories as explained on page 246 To perform acquisitions in user activated recording mode Automatic recording not selected 1 2 3 Switch to acquisition mode by clicking the Acquis tab in the Control bar or by selecting Acquisition from the Operation menu Select a file from the file list in the Acquis tab Once you have selected a file you can start acquisitions in one of three ways By clicking Start on the Acquis tab of the Control bar By selecting Start from the Operation menu or By pressing F2 Data starts appearing in the different views as you scan The background appears in white meaning that data IS NOT saved to the hard drive Click Start Save from the Control bar or press F10 The background now appears green meaning that data is now saved to the hard drive Click Stop Save or press F10 again to stop saving data The background switches to white
227. ng installation Q Installing O Finalizing installation Appendix A Figure A 4 Finishing the installation Magnifi 3 0B3 Setup Complete Click the Finish button to exit the Setup Wizard i Collecting information ie Preparing installation installing QJ finalizing installation View readme file Launch Magnifi 3 083 lt Back Finish EE Cancel Program Compatibility Assistant This program might not have installed correctly If this program didn t install correctly try reinstalling using settings that are compatible with this version of Windows Program Sentinel HASP Run time Environment Installer Publisher SafeNet Inc Location C Users MGrenier QTEC AppData haspdinst exe Reinstall using recommended settings This program installed correctly ri What settings are applied Reinstalling the Software 301 302 Appendix A Managing License Keys 304 Upgrading Hardware License Keys Obtaining Upgrade Codes To obtain the upgrade code save the license file txt that was emailed to you by Eddyfi Upgrading to New License Keys To upgrade your hardware license key 1 Start Magnifi 2 Select Manage License from the Special menu Note Jf no license is installed the License Validation Failure window appears Figure B 1 The License Validation Failure window License Validation Failure Magnif cannot run without a valid licence Please make sure that
228. nge Appendix C Figure C 5 315 New toolbar and Acquisition Setup menu m Magnifi 3 3B1T6 Default setup EP File View Operation Layouts d Preferences Special Help poe Setup Acq Scan Parameters Ficoil a CANT Aiea ton gup 4p Channels L We C scans E Encoder Setup Indication Codes Info Automati Calibration Points U5 Convert to Ectane Sai pa Sizing Curves qj 7 Landmarks Processe Materials Probe Database Setup Wizard j Automated Sequence Woo Setting Up Channels When working with a legacy test unit like a TC7700 or MS5800 you can set various channel parameters as explained in the following pages Once all three tabs are properly filled out click Apply All values are input into the TC7700 MS5800 setup To access channel parameters on the Settings menu point to Acquisition Setup and then click Channels You can also click the Channels button in the TC7700 Acquisition Setup toolbar The Channels dialog box appears Creating a Setup for the Test Unit 316 Figure C 6 The TC7700 MS5800 Channels dialog box Global tab Channels a Global Generator Raw Channels Frequency aty 4 a Activate data type w s oa a Bandwidth Hz 2 attenuation ASME 597 143 Hz 14 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s 0 Hz 0 in s
229. ngle value to a series of coils frequencies or labels select the channels C scans to which you want to assign this value To select contiguous channels C scans in the list click one channel C scan press the SHIFT key and click the last channel C scan that you want to select All channels C scans between the first and last selected become selected as well To select non contiguous channels C scans in the list press the CTRL key while clicking on all the channels C scans that you want to select Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 79 6 From the drop down list in the Multiple edition section select the element to which you want to assign a common value Coil Frequency or Label 7 In the text box underneath the drop down list enter the value to assign Click Apply The value entered is applied to all selected channels C scans 9 Click OK when you are done Setting Materials in Use You can manage the materials in use from the Material window To do so 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Click Materials in the lower right corner of the General tab The Materials window opens 440 III For more information on working in the Materials window see Managing Materials on page 186 Setting General Application Preferences 80 Managing Setup Properties For each setup you can view a
230. nifi features a material manager that contains the basic properties necessary to perform electromagnetic and IRIS inspections Materials are managed in the Materials dialog box From there you can Add custom materials from files Create new materials Copy existing materials to modify certain parameters Remove custom materials Add notes to materials Import material files gt UM To open the Materials dialog box on the Settings menu click Materials Figure 3 133 Materials dialog box Materials Custom Materials Ultrasound Electrical Magnetic Velocity m s Resistivity Q m Permeability Aluminum 320 000 0 0002824 Name LSS Ee Notes for selected material Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 187 Adding New Materials Before adding a new material you have to know the three most important characteristics of this material from a testing standpoint the speed of ultrasound in the material in m s the electrical resistivity of the material in Q m the magnetic permeability of the material To add a new material to the default list 1 On the Settings menu click Materials The Materials dialog box appears Figure 3 134 Materials dialog Materials Custom Materials N Ultrasound Electrical Magnetic amit Velocity m s Resistivity Q m Permeability Aluminum Canner nickel 7 Notes for selected material Import 2
231. nimum frequency allowed 100 000 kHz Maximum amplitude allowed 8 00 V Add Cancel lt lt Back lexi 1 Enter the number of coils in your probe in the Coil quantity field Spacing between poles is automatically set to 2 in the Pole spacing list 2 Check the Is circular box if your impedance probe is circular 3 Select the adequate impedance bridge value in the Impedance Bridge group 4 Enter the required gain in the Gain field 5 Enter a channel prefix in the Channel prefix field The resulting channel name is indicated in the Resulting Channel Name field 6 To properly protect the probe enter the minimum frequency and maximum amplitude allowed in the Minimum frequency allowed and Maximum amplitude allowed fields of the Probe Protection subsection 7 To enable channel groups check the Absolute and or Differential box es in the Channel Groups section You can also assign prefixes to these channel groups in the Prefix fields under the appropriate column 8 Enter the frequency amplitude and phase for each channel group that you need To add frequencies click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups section This adds a new line of data maximum of four under the first where you can also enter the proper frequency amplitude and phase 9 When you are done configuring the topology window click Finish Your Ectane is now properly configured Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 91
232. ning a perfectly operational firmware Yellow exclamation mark The Ectane is running a version of the firmware that is more recent than what Magnifi expected You can still connect to the instrument and perform tasks as usual Red X mark The Ectane is running an older version of the firmware not recognized by Magnifi In these situations you need to update the firmware as explained below The Instrument Connection window with a yellow exclamation mark Instrument Connection Ectane 256 EC 92 33 00 FF FF Connect 1 The window that appears is similar to the one above but a red X replaces the yellow exclamation mark in the Status column 2 Click Config The following window appears Chapter 6 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 291 Figure 6 2 Upgrading the Ectane firmware Network Information Embedded Software Update Mode Satic IP Address Use the embedded software that comes with Magniti ibe cees 192 168 100 1 gt Use custom embedded software Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 3 Select Use the embedded software that comes with Magnifi from the Embedded Software Update section 4 Click Send firmware to the instrument the circling blue arrow button The Ectane firmware is updated to perfectly match your version of Magnifi 5 Once the upgrade is complete you will have to restart both Magnifi and the Ectane Upgrading the Ectane Firmware 292 Fixing Corrupted Ectane Firmware
233. nit text box type the number of samples that you want per encoder count Appendix C 321 4 On the Divider mode list select whether the acquisition is triggered when the encoder detects the signal s falling edge Down raising edge Up or either of them Up and down Once all these parameters are defined a number appears in the Resulting divider box This is the number of encoder counts that the software uses to perform the acquisition Setting Up Encoder Parameters Once the general parameters are defined you can specify more precise encoder counter parameters To do so 1 On the Select counter list select the encoder counter that you want to configure 2 To activate the encoder channel in Magnifi select the Activate check box 3 Inthe Name text box type the encoder channel name that is created when you activate the corresponding encoder 4 Configure the properties of the selected encoder a On the Type list select the type of your encoder Clock direction Quadrature Up or Down b On the Action upon start list select the action to be carried out at the start of an acquisition None no action upon start Reset the encoder is reset upon start or Preset the value in the Preset box see below is used upon start c On the Filter list select the encoder low pass filter frequency Note This feature is used to filter out noise that may be present in the encoder data Most of the time this feature
234. nked H Hyperlink Link views Right click Changes to next value Not linked 1 9 Linked H Hyperlink Link views Middle click Opens a list of available links Label Left click Right click Click any to select Changes to previous next channel that is on this label Scale value Left click Changes to previous voltage value Scale value Right click Changes to next voltage value Scale value Middle click Opens a list of voltage values Click any to select Scale value Left click vertical drag Increases Decreases the voltage value Measurement cursor Left click horizontal drag gt Moves the cursor left and right In Side Views 336 Table D 5 Mouse and keyboard functions continued Measurement cursor Crop Line Signal Area Signal Area Signal Area Signal Area Double left click Left click vertical drag Right click drag up or down Left click drag up down Left click drag left right Right click tp amp t e Moves the cursor to the intercepting closest data point crop line Moves the line up and down Increases or decreases the voltage value Moves data representation up and down inside the view Moves the signal left and right Contextual menu Appendix D 337 General Keyboard Shortcuts Table D 6 Keyboard shortcuts Anywhere ALT F4 Closes Magnifi Anywhere CTRL P Opens the print screen dialog box
235. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan 218 Establishing Communication with Ectane Instruments c ccccsscecssssseessseeeesseeeesseeeeeees 218 Loading Setup Files sirrisiia naaa aaa aaa aaa a aa aaa aiai 220 Loading Existing SCUD FUES cccccccssssesessssesssseesescusesssenseuenusessceusesecuensusauensuscuneusauensusanens 220 Loading Recently Used Setup Files 0 0 0 ceccesecsssseeeesssreeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeesseseeeseeseteesssenesenees 221 Converting Legacy Acquisition Setup Files to Ectane Files cccscccsssssessssresesseteeeeseeeens 221 Performing Acquisitions In Setup Mode cccccsssssscscccssnsseeccescssseeeceeecsnsseecennsssseeesenas 225 BGM IGING saena a tease aduanabanabesdesnasthatcnassauenanahavsuentoonaanct 225 Starting an ACQUISITION in Setup Mode ccceseecseseecesseeeessseeescseteseseteseeetesesatesesaneeens 221 SVINE lB 121s Gaetan nner at ee as On nO ae ae ee ee ne ee eee 228 Performing RFT Specific TASKS sssssssccssssssseecccsscssseeececcssseeeceennsseeeeeeesnseeeeennnsnsssesenenas 229 NOMAZI UO ea cece edsatsauancuwaay cna ate Syusuatndue sabihliwa E E E reaooaencamnares 229 Storing Nominal Tube RESPONSE c ccccceseecsssseeccseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseteseceteseessatessatesessaneeens 231 Performing IRIS specific TASKS ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 233 Preparing for Gate Adjustments ccccsceccss
236. ns 53 Configuring Side VIEWS cccccessccscssssecesseeceseeeceessteeeeateseesateseesatasecsatesessatessesatasesatesssatesens 54 Configuring A scan Views ccccccccescccsssseecsseeecssseeeessseeeeeseetecesateeeseateeeeseaueesatesesateseseateesns 56 Configuring A scan View Parameters ccccsccccssssscecsseecessetecessereeesetececsueeessetesecseteseseatesens 57 Configuring Projection VIEWS cccccccccsssccsseecceseeeeesseeesesateeeeateceeeteseeutaseeatesecatesessatesens 58 Configuring Information Fields ccccsccecsssecscssreecesreeeeseeeesesseeesesetesecaeeesatesseseatesesatesens 59 LINKING VIOWG cinan a aa 61 Displaying Mouse and Keyboard Functions sssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 63 Exiting Magnill oina seacwanevecasadeeueeussssseuntunsdunesecteeauswesccuseusiawens 64 Table of Contents Preparing Acquisition Setups with the Wizard 65 SEP WIZA oiiaaie a A aAA 66 Component GEOMEIIES s sssscssiensnsasesriasadnananssinanunbonendetcanncnonenstdeundtatmaahdncamnnbatuneneedaunencbuaanincs 66 Wizard WV OFAIIOW siscetsoce sacansaind seetiawesosencns santwadesna ds peanncdsaaampedsendipedunn cupesnneisaddnneasocinpeasnedsecastned 66 Interactions between the Setup Wizard ANd Magnifi ccccccccssseccesseesessseeeeeseeeesseeeseeaeees 69 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups sss 71 Setting General Application Preferences sssssccsssssssee
237. nt BB No instrument is available ONP An instrument is active and ready for connection Mig fZ 192 168 1002 An instrument is connected and ready for acquisition tan 74 A battery indicator is seen when the connection is mun established Double clicking the battery provides more details about the battery status lt Ectane Batteries Information Setting up the Ectane 220 Loading Setup Files After establishing communications with your instrument it is now time to start working with a setup file You can Loading Existing Setup Files create a new setup see Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups on page 81 load an existing setup or load a recently used setup file To load an existing setup select Load Setup from the File menu A window opens where you can select from many existing setups You can also browse through directories to find the setup file that you want Figure 4 3 The Open window rc aj Open GQ p Libraries Magnifi Setup gt v Organize v New folder z Favorites E Desktop W Downloads Name Date modified di Dropbox E Mes documents Magnifi Setup library Includes 1 location 4 Setup 12 U Recent Places C Users PSamson QTEC My Documents Magnifi d Inspection Project 2 2012 03 21 14 28 g Libraries idi Inspection Project Test 2012 03 19 16 33 E Documents 20 Magnifi Data 20 amp Magnifi Setup a Music Pictures E V
238. oaded select Edit Report from the Operation menu or click Edit report from the Analysis toolbar The Report window appears Figure 5 24 The Report window D Report C Lsers F Sanson QTEC Documents Mage Data Report db lt Deg mm 235 6000 test ung Circ ICA ncrcling 1739 14420 mm 2 10000 j EN Pay mn ot weer Copy Uee La AJ La on Part pions Ep hd Hemde anik 2 Click Insert to add a completely new report entry at the end of the list of entries or Insert Copy to add a copy of the selected entry if any at the end of the list An entry is added at the end of the list of entries From the Report Status To add entries in a report from the report status B 1 With a data file loaded click Show report status from the Analysis toolbar The report status appears at the bottom of the data display area Figure 5 25 The report status TH T pii 2 a im W tei una cis iuad ECA Bezie P VPP 4 0000 feo Enel Spe LA oem pe ooo ame i amp l tSn a Th Soe S04 men 2 Right click the report status From the contextual menu that appears select Insert to add a completely new report entry at the end of the list of entries or Insert Copy of Entry to add a copy of the selected entry Gif any at the end of the list An entry is added at the end of the list of entries Managing Reports 278 From the Indication Codes Toolbar The Indication codes toolbar allows you to enter features specified in the Indication Codes w
239. oder from the Encoder trigger drop down list e Ifyou selected anything but Encoder from the Get position from drop down list enter the probe speed in the Probe part speed field Acquisition resolution and density are automatically calculated based on the entered values Configuring Scan Parameters 128 6 In the C scan subsection define the range of values used to display C scans in a data pane Figure 3 67 The C scan subsection C scan PARIS Y anis From 0 0000 mm 0 0000 mm Size 2000 0000 mm 1000 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 5000 mm smpl 0 5000 mm smpl a Inthe From fields enter the starting point for the C scan display on the X and Y axes based on the size of the piece under test b Inthe Size fields enter the end point for the C scan display on the X and Y axes based on the size of the piece under test Normally the value entered in this field is the total size of the piece under test c Inthe Grid resolution columns enter the length and width of each sample on the grid 7 Click OK when you are done setting up your scan parameters Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to the Magnifi application Click Cancel to discard all the modifications that you made Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 129 For 2D Surface with Raster Scan Array Probes To set up scan parameters for 2D surface raster scans with array probes 1 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings m
240. oders and Syta puts To configure an encoder 1 2 Figure 3 12 To activate that encoder configuration select the check box before the line Click Encoder n under the Name column and enter the name that you want to give to your encoder Make sure that you give your encoder a name that will be meaningful to all users In the Type column select the type of the encoder Quadrature encoders producing two phase quadrature signals often called MA and B signals The quadrature counter is clocked by each transition of A and B signals and the counting direction depends on the phase relationship of these signals The counter counts up when PA leads MB and it counts down when PA lags MB see Figure 3 12 Quadrature type encoder signal B Counter Wiest 60 423456789 87 65 43 2 Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Figure 3 13 83 Clock dir encoders providing clock and direction signals or clock signal only The counter is clocked by each positive transition of the clock signal The counting direction is controlled by the logic level of the direction signal When this signal logic level is low the counter counts up When the logic level is high the counter counts down see Figure 3 13 Clock dir encoder signal Clock 4 signal Direction signal 4 salad nae tput Velie 0 1 2 3 2 1 If the encoder provides a clock signal only the co
241. om www eddyfi com Eddyfi NDT Inc Eddyfi Ectane Magnifi and their associated logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Eddyfi NDT Inc Eddyfi reserves itself the right to change product offerings and specifications without notice 2013 11 04
242. on From Begin End Negative Positioning Enabled Threshold 0 0 mm Import Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 181 2 Click Add An empty line is added to the list on the left Figure 3 127 Adding a landmark Landmarks 3 Enter the name of the landmark in the Name column and press TAB The Type field is now selected 4 Enter the type of landmark in the Type column tubesheet support plate baffles etc The types entered here will be used elsewhere for automatic detection see Editing the Detect Landmark Processing Unit on page 157 5 Press TAB The Position mm field is now selected Enter the position of the landmark Note The distance unit used in this window depends on the one selected in the Preferences window See Setting Measurement Units on page 73 6 Inthe Position From section select whether you create your landmarks from the beginning or the end of the tube Important Keep in mind that the beginning and end positions apply to the acquisition and not the tube Usually acquisitions start at the end of a tube and end at the beginning of the tube as you pull the probe fowards you Landmarks must be entered in the order in which they will be detected Normally the position of the defect signal is given based on the distance added to a previously known landmark However depending on the situation it might be preferable to subtract a distance from a following d
243. on check subsection Resolution check Tube ID 20 0000 mm Circumferential axis Axial asis Mininium density 1 0000 stopilrim 2 p000 amplmm Speed rotatior 50 0000 Ips 25 0000 mmi Acquisition density 1 2732 smpl mm 2 0000 rnp ror Acquisition resolution 0 7654 romsmpl 0 5000 mmsmpl Maximum probe speed 63 6620 Ips 25 0000 mms a Enter the tube internal diameter in the Tube ID field Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 121 b Inthe Minimum density fields under the Circumferential axis and Axial axis columns enter the number of samples that you want to take per unit of distance c Inthe Speed rotation fields under the Circumferential axis and Axial axis columns enter the speed in in s or mm s at which the probe will travel along both axes Once all this data is entered Magnifi calculates acquisition density and resolution as well as the maximum probe speed 8 In the C scan subsection define the range of values used to display C scans in a data pane Figure 3 57 The C scan subsection C scari Circumferential axis Axial axis From 0 deg 0 0000 ren Size 360 deg 6000 0000 mie Display resolution 2 0000 deg smpl 0 5000 mmsmpl Min display resolution 4 5000 deg smpl Automatic axial display resolution Cawg ok cancel a Inthe Display resolution field under the Circumferential axis column enter the angle variation required between samples b Inthe From field under the Axial axis column enter the
244. on view cylindrical view option only 4 internal Changes the aspect ratio of the tube wall thickness compared to the outside diameter diameter by reducing the internal diameter reduction cylindrical view only 5 Scale Indicates the scale of the displayed data For more information on modifying the scale see Measuring Indications on page 261 6 Indication code Indicates the code that will be assigned to an indication when you click it assignment buttons Managing Layouts 30 Dependent vs Independent Panes Panes in a window have certain specific behaviors that you should be aware of before you start creating layouts Dependent panes are created by using a Multi split horizontally or vertically button Figure 1 30 Multi split horizontally and Multi split vertically buttons bel H Dependent panes are characterized by two specific elements The split line is thinner than a independent pane split line When you place the cursor over the split line the cursor does not change to indicate that you can resize the pane Figure 1 31 Characteristics of dependent panes r ee 2 E oe oe oe oe Dependent pane Independent pane split line split line Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 31 Independent panes are created by using a Split horizontally or vertically button Figure 1 32 Split horizontally and Split vertically buttons eS WwW Independent panes are characterized
245. one vernda d Logehrd POLO D001 1i File folder Cpt Seftevaresrchive fier Ub Magrath 2011 4 14 00 Fale Fildes Cat Mechanical Asda E Mes fichiers regus 2011 09 13 16 File folder aft SefreaerePreducts Ais J rmt AU10 08 30 12 36 Fie folder Sgt Cieri Visewdlata 0 de Scanned Documents 2011 02 28 Oo Fale Folder Se Publicthare Mismedati d inapt ANO 008 154 Fale Poller Cot Qualy ervdata 9 J Snagit Same DOL 0 06 5 55 File folder Sgt Transfer sredata 1 Spt Producteon redaka File name C scan template est gt open conc 3 Browse to the directory where the C scan template file cst is located 4 Select the file and click Open You return to the C scan Configuration window and the C scan is now available Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Exporting C scans To export C scans 175 1 With a data file open either select C scans from the Settings menu or double click C scan in the Setup tab The C scan Configuration window appears Figure 3 120 The C scan Configuration window 1 en or OOOO U CF1 Process State Processing Type Details Delete Build from channel Export New Interpolation 2 Select the C scan to export 3 Click Export A standard Save As dialog box appears Figure 3 121 Exporting a C scan ual Eave As GU Libane r Documents t Urgance Pewa folcher aE Computer icy Saf Develope
246. onfiguration window appears Figure 6 7 The Instrument Configuration window Instrument Conmfiguraton i Heimik kioman Erbedded Selivare dae Mode Spastic IP Address O Wee the embedded eothvare thal comes with Magnih IPaddress 150 188 100 1 Use custom embedded sofbvare Subnet Mask 25i 256 28 p Gabewayr 000 4 Cancel 4 Inthe Network Information section select DHCP from the Mode drop down list This deactivates all fields in the section 5 Click the downward pointing green arrow The Ectane is now ready to be used in DHCP mode Chapter 6 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 295 Configuring Ectane for Static IP Addresses One of the advantages of the Ectane is the use of the DHCP addressing scheme which is not compatible with older instruments like a TC7700 or an MS5800 If you want to continue using these instruments and use the Ectane as well you need to change the Ectane s hardware configuration By switching your Ectane from a DHCP addressing scheme to a static IP address you can continue using older instruments while still being able to work with the Ectane To change the Ectane addressing scheme 1 Launch Magnifi 2 Click Connect to an instrument or select Connect to Instrument from the A s R Operation menu The Instrument Connection window appears Figure 6 8 The Instrument Connection window Instrument Connection Ectane MAC Address 256 EC 92 33 00 FF FF 3
247. or more information see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the name of the channel or C scan For more information on naming channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the label given to a channel For more information on labeling channels see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the type of data displayed C scan X or Y component or channels Indicates whether the vertical or horizontal component of the data is displayed Gives the position of the vertical cursors and the amplitude of the horizontal cursors Indicates the scale of the displayed data For more information on modifying the scale see Measuring Indications on page 261 Indicates the frequency of the displayed data For more information on frequencies see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the coil to which belongs the displayed data For more information on coil numbers see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Allows you to link views For more information see Linking Views on page 61 21 22 A scans Figure 1 22 A scan view FWp 9 81mm FWt 6614ns BWp 12 50 mm BWt 7089 ns WT 269mm WL 101 5 PDt 21 55 mm AR J E i men os Scan Duration Gain Tension Input Filter Rectification Smoothing Filter Chapter 1 Introducing Magnif
248. or the file in the File name text box 3 Click Browse to access the directory where you want to save this data file 4 From the Selection subsection select whether you want to save all data or just the data found between the cursors 5 Click Save The data that you selected is saved in the location that you chose Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 229 Performing RFT Specific Tasks Before performing an official inspection with the remote field technique using the voltage plane you need to Normalize the signal Store the nominal tube response Normalization Note for normalization to function properly a voltage plane must first exist on the Processed Channel menu To normalize the signal 1 Acquire a calibration standard that contains a simulated tube support plate TSP 2 With the data selection cursor select the TSP signal and adjust the scale in the voltage plane view so as to have a good view of the signal 3 Select the manual measurement mode by right clicking the voltage plane pointing to Measure and then clicking Manual Alternately you can click the manual button at the bottom of the view Figure 4 13 Selecting manual measurements Measure b Maximum Amplitude gt Two points Phase gt Manual Best Fit T Properties COR COR v ext 360 Performing RFT Specific Tasks 230 4 Draw a vector from the beginning of the nominal tube signal to the tip of
249. orded setup box if you want to use the same setup file for all read back data b Check the Do not display data during loading box if you do not want to display data as it is loaded from memory c Inthe Speed subsection select whether you want to display data at the speed it was acquired or as fast as possible 4 Click the browse button in the Readback Setup wizard section to browse to the folder where the setup files are stored 5 Click the browse button in the Report section to browse to the folder where the reports are stored 6 To automatically merge C scan indications check the Automatically merge C scan indications box 7 To bring back the default layout every time you read the next file in a series check the Restore default layout on next data file load box For information on zooms see Working with Zooms on page 261 Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 257 Opening Inspection Projects Usually the first step to perform after switching to Analysis mode see Switching between Operation Modes on page 8 is opening an inspection project in Magnifi To do so 1 From inside Magnifi select File gt Manage Inspection Project The Manage Inspection Project window appears Figure 5 2 The Manage Inspection Project window r a Manage Inspection Project Project Name InspectionPy Current Project location C Users PSamson QTEC Documents Inspections List List Format Inspection In
250. ote The new name given to a processing unit also appears as the window name when you double click to edit that processing unit Setting Up Processed Channels 162 Managing G scans C scans are two dimensional representations of eddy current data over a scan area You configure C scans in a way similar to processed channels but with the main purpose of modifying the displayed data to better analyze the results Important C scan configuration implies that you have an in depth knowledge and understanding of the way your probe is designed Creating C scans To create a C scan 1 With a data file open select C scans from the Settings menu double click C We scan in the Setup tab or click C scan from the C scan toolbar The C scan Configuration window appears Figure 3 104 The C scan Configuration window i a C Scan Configuration C Scan CF1 CF2 CF3 CF4 New Delete Rename Duplicate Import Export CF1 Process State Processing Type Build from channel Scale Interpolation Details Axial 2 000 0 Circ 2 pts Add Delete Cancel Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 163 2 In the C sean section click New The New C scan window appears where you enter the C scan name in the text field and click OK You return to the C scan Configuration window Figure 3 105 The New C scan window z New C Scan
251. outs You can duplicate an existing layout if needed To do so 1 From the Layouts menu select Modify Layouts The Modify Layouts window appears Figure 1 35 The Modify Layouts window Modify Layouts Active Name Default Delmi Layout a 2 Snp Charts 1 Lissajous A 16 Sirip Charts i a amine an b BackUp eee Reload a Copy J Close From the list of layouts highlight the layout the you want to duplicate Click Copy The highlighted layout is copied and added to the list with the name of the original layout followed by a number in parentheses Figure 1 36 Copied layout Modify Layouts Actve Name Default Layout 4 gt oe Y d atp Charts i Letijous 2 Strip Charts 1 Lissajous 2 SS Gose Bd You can rename the layout as you see fit after it has been copied Managing Layouts 34 Importing Layouts from an Existing Setup If you already have a setup file containing the layouts that you want to use you can import these layouts in a new setup To do so 1 From the Layouts menu select Create New Layout gt Import Layouts 2 Inthe Import Layouts window that opens click the Browse button A standard Open dialog box appears 3 Browse to find the setup file containing the layouts that you want to import and click Open The layouts available in the selected setup file appear in the Layouts list of the Import Layouts window 4 Click Import The listed layouts are now imported in
252. ow report status from the Analysis toolbar The report status appears at the bottom of the data display area Figure 5 28 The report status f 1 T J eo Tal T Deg T ja Chiral C iu AE Y pi Disa Y pei Fig marea Di wha Yig is ft a iw kai wp pang PEA irie PP P LEWD Tad x 4 La iM ter emil i DE ECA Erri FP JE LEEG T pot litem per IO pt E 0 ty 2 fo ern Erel SCA mem 2 Right click the report status window From the contextual menu that appears select Delete to delete the entry located under the cursor or Delete All Entries to delete all entries from the report Figure 5 29 Deleting from the contextual menu f l n 7 f iriri arbry a insert Copy of Entry i Edi Entry f I i Delete Enar ts i Delete All Grirtes Print pe ipigi i E i Display profiles Copy Coment te Clipboard I i Sort rae R Column W a Oefcet Y pot Fide nant Dhi WM Wileng o LR Fi ifa ral BCA Eines PP VRP LO 6 6 LLIS 35 test jung Eir Dow IZA Dincic Pp VEP 95000 A LEP kd HS tem bean ing fue Fok Enri v Y ps MAT Spes le SYimpkln H impt la Tits ATi Sent rel BHS mim I o o a GE a E Note This last step with the contextual menu can also be used with the same results in the Report window Managing Reports 280 Editing Report Entry Values The values of all report entries added automatically or manually are editable You can edit them from the Report window or the report status There
253. pane is split vertically and horizontally in the number of panes that you entered in the Multi split in both directions window Note Panes created with the Multi split button horizontally vertically or in both directions are NOT resizable are dependent on the original pane and all show the same view Removing Panes To remove panes from a window 1 2 Figure 1 46 From the Layout toolbar select the Remove the custom layout button Position the cursor over the pane that you want to remove The cursor changes to this The Remove Pane cursor hse Click in the pane to remove Managing Layouts 37 If you clicked on an independent pane only this pane is removed If you removed a horizontal pane the independent pane underneath fills the empty space If you removed a vertical pane the independent pane to the right fills the empty space If you clicked on a dependent pane all panes associated to the original pane the independent pane that existed before the multi split are removed save for the original pane If you removed a horizontal pane the independent pane underneath fills the space left empty If you removed a vertical pane the independent pane to the right fills the space left empty Specifying a Default Layout When Maenifi starts it loads its default layout You can specify a different default layout as the one under the default Magnifi configuration To do so 1 Design a layout as needed yo
254. pen an inspection project in Magnifi To do so 1 From inside Magnifi select File gt Manage Inspection Project The Manage Inspection Project window appears Figure 4 29 The Manage Inspection Project window e a Manage Inspection Project Project Name Customer XYZ Current Project location C DATA Inspections List List Format Exchanger B Use Local Inspection Setup Row Column Ready for Inspection Exchanger C Use Current System Setup Zone Row Column Ready for Inspection Inspection Information Folder and files structure New inspection C DATA Customer XYZ Exchanger A Setup Setup Exchanger A magsetup Data Data rowcol magdata List Data List Ist Report Reports Report mdb Tubesheet Tubesheet Screen capture Pictures 2 Ifthe project opened by default is not the one you are looking for click Browse next to the Project Name text box From the Open window that appears select the inspection project that you want to open and click OK If you do not have an inspection project defined for your inspection see Creating Inspection Projects on page 214 3 In the list of inspections displayed select the appropriate inspection 4 If you need to perform a new inspection for the same project click Add to define a new inspection in the Inspections List The Edit Inspection Information window appears Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 247 Figure 4 3
255. ponent or channels Indicates the scale of the displayed data For more information on modifying the scale see Measuring Indications on page 261 Allows you to rotate a signal and indicates the angle of rotation For more information on rotating signals see Calibrating Systems on page 238 Indicates the frequency of the displayed data For more information on frequencies see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Indicates the coil to which belongs the displayed data For more information on coil numbers see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Allows you to link views For more information see Linking Views on page 61 Figure 1 16 The Lissajous measurement bar Table 1 3 LPP MR vm Many 2 48 Vpp 7 Description of Lissajous measurement bar items I Measurement method selection Rotation Indication code assignment Indication code selection Size Measured angle Measured amplitude Allows you to choose a different measurement method for the phase data displayed in the Lissajous PP peak to peak MR maximum rate VM vertical maximum MaN manual For more information on measurement methods see Setting Amplitude Phase Measurement Methods on page 74 Allows you to quickly rotate signals 180 For more information on rotating signals see Calibrating Systems on page 238 Indicates the code t
256. pply a single gain and phase to all channels Leave unchecked for individual channel calibration b Check the Assisted array calibration box to help in the determination of the direction of the measurements vector Otherwise leave these boxes unchecked They are not useful for conventional probes 3 In the Amplitude Phase and Orientation rows as appropriate enter the amplitude phase and or orientation at which you want to set the signals Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 155 4 On the Ref lists select the calibration point used to measure the amplitude phase and or orientation 5 On the Amplitude list select the amplitude measurement method that you want to use Absolute uses a straight line from the zero position to the main cursor position Absolute Horizontal uses only the horizontal component from the imaginary zero level line to the main cursor position Absolute Peak uses a straight line from the zero position to the peak value of the data selection Absolute Peak Horizontal uses only the horizontal component from the imaginary zero position to the peak value of the data selection Absolute Peak Vertical uses only the vertical component from the imaginary zero position to the peak value of the data selection Absolute Vertical uses only the vertical component from the imaginary zero level line to the main cursor position End
257. process see Managing C scans on page 162 and or measure the references required to generate the sizing curve related to a C scan see Setting Up Sizing Curves on page 200 3 Select a reference in the list underneath the calibration radio buttons The content of the list depends on the selection made in step 2 4 Position the data selection cursor on the signal corresponding to the reference selected previously Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 241 Figure 4 24 C scan calibration 2039 LPP MR vm Many jo 0 DEPLT 0 58 Vpp 221 pp Z 5 Click the measurement button Once the reference measurement is taken a green check mark appears next to the reference name in the list Note The measurement is performed along the axis defined in the Scale process of the C scan If the measurement is along the Y axis make sure that the vertical segment of the selection brackets is placed over the defect 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 for all references that you want to use for calibration purposes You do not have to take measurements for all references 7 Click Calibrate System calibration is performed based on the reference measurements taken 8 Click Close Note After calibration it is always possible to rotate the signal further by click dragging the rotation button in the Lissajous see page 14 Calibrating Systems 242 Calibrating Landmarks Landmark calibration is normally performed on r
258. projection view appears Figure 1 71 Projection view Properties dialog box lE Properties View type Longitudinal Circumferential Cylindrical Processing options Highlight detected echoes Hide missed OD echoes Display nominal wall thickness background Color settings Background set in Preferences Thickness set in Preferences Thickness interior Nominal wall thickness background Target pin area Cursor Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 3 Inthe View type section select the projection view type that you want based on the tube axis that you want to represent 4 Select the desired processing options a Highlight detected echoes gives a different color to the material inside the wall thickness compared to the detected internal and external echoes that remain black You can also choose to Hide missed OD echoes by selecting the check box which hides the part of signals going beyond the outer limit of the tube where external OD echoes are not detected b Display nominal wall thickness background displays the theoretical position of the tube behind the data c Render data in acquisition displays data in real time 5 Select the desired color settings for the various data elements displayed The background and thickness are set in the Preferences window see Customizing Color Schemes on page 41 For the other elements click the color indicated Color palettes appear Click on the color that you want
259. ptures you can add visual notes to the document To do so 1 From the Operation menu select Create Note A bubble note appears in the U data display area Figure 5 15 A bubble note on screen 2 Use the green positioning handles to make the bubble note point to the screen element of your choice 3 Enter text and click outside the bubble note Important These notes cannot be saved and are only usable on screen captures Once you close the document the notes disappear and cannot be retrieved Chapter 5 Analyzing amp Reporting Data 271 Managing Reports Once you have performed your scans and acquired data from your inspections you can generate reports to keep track of your inspections Configuring Reports The first thing that you need to do when producing reports is to decide which data appears in the report You can do so in one of two ways From predefined profiles From scratch From Predefined Profiles To do so 1 Select Edit Report from the Operation menu or click Edit report from the Analysis toolbar The Report window opens and the path to the file is indicated in the title bar Figure 5 16 The Report window j Report C Users PSamson QTEC Documents Magnifi Data Report mdb W Deg Code Channel C Scan File name X pos X axis units Y pos Y leng Y axis units 28 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 176400 mm 213 50 6 0000 mm 59 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 331200 mm 213 00 4 0000 mm 236
260. rate will be controlled internal clock external clock or predefined encoder Note The encoder option is available only if an encoder has been previously defined For more information on defining encoders see page 82 Figure 3 34 The Acquisition rate section Internal clock selected Acquisition rate Sampling clack Internal clack Requested 4000 0000 Hz Actual 4000 Hz a From the Sampling clock drop down list select whether the acquisition rate 1s controlled by an internal clock an external clock or a preset encoder b Ifyou chose Internal clock enter the acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field c Ifyou chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use Figure 3 35 The Acquisition rate section External clock selected E Ew Acquisition rate Sampling clack External clock Max acquisition rate 4000 Hz Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups d Ifyou chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested resolution in the Requested field and the max
261. reparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 151 Editing the Filter Processing Unit m i The Filter processing unit allows you to filter out certain frequencies from the eile acquired signals Filter l 1 To select which frequencies to filter out 1 Double click the processing unit icon the Filter dialog box opens Figure 3 95 Configuring the Filter processing unit Filter Low pass High pass Filter frequency 100 Hz Filter order 2 Cancel _ 2 Select whether you want to apply a low pass or high pass filter 3 Enter the cutoff frequency that you want to filter out in the Filter frequency field 4 Enter the filter order that you want to filter out in the Filter order field 5 Click OK The Filter dialog box disappears and the Filter processing unit is configured Editing the Median Filter Processing Unit gt The Median Filter processing unit which is mostly used in ECA inspections Dah allows you to filter data based on a certain number of samples a k a the manm window Using the low pass filter allows you to keep slow variation signals lift ea off variations or long defects while using the high pass filter allows you to keep fast variation signals sharp defects coming from notches or pits Note The wider the window high number of samples the less efficient the high pass filter will be To configure the median filter processing unit 1 Double click the processing unit icon
262. rignal data file CAU File E View Operation Layouts Special He aa yt pO Ka g 2 Preferences g View Settings Operation Lay Setup Acquis Analysis Setup Automatic recording Scan parameters C scan Processed channels Setup Acq Scan Parameters Acquisition Setup gt Ww C scans Setup Indication Codes Automati Calibration Points Scan pa Sizing cu C scan Landmarks a Materials 5 Probe Database Setup Wizard gt Automated Sequence mT Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 201 Figure 3 145 The Sizing Curves Configuration window a IL Sizing Curves Configuration i e eae oa aap Calibration Points General Definitions Create sizing curve and set general parameters Short groove S RFT Flat Bottom Hole RFT Inspection Type Tube from ID z ID Name Technique Based on Source Type iS Short groove RFT Channel ABS F1 Phase x Flat Bottom Hole RFT Channel i DIF F1 Phase i2 Add Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish 2 From the General page select the type of inspection that you want to perform from the Inspection Type drop down list Plate Tube from ID Tube from OD Note The type of inspection selected will be applied to all sizing curves defined in the setup 3 Click Add to add the sizing curve to the list
263. rk card be configured to obtain an IP address automatically This will ensure a truly plug and play experience with the instrument Note You can also use your workstation with older instruments e g MS5800 and TC7700 For more information on that topic see Establishing Communication with Magnifi on page 318 To establish communication with the Ectane 1 Start the Ectane as explained in the Instruction Manual 2 Start the Magnifi software 3 Click Connect to an instrument Figure 4 1 Connecting to an Instrument ET s Fi A We Connect to an instrument pons J 10 0 Note Jfthe Connect to an instrument button is not active select New gt Ectane Setup from the File menu 4 Select the available instrument and click Connect see Figure 4 2 Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 219 Figure 4 2 Selecting an instrument Instrument Connection Ectane Note Jfno Ectane is present in the Instrument Connection window or if the Status box contains a red X see Quick Troubleshooting Guide on page 288 A green check mark or a yellow exclamation mark are both valid communication statuses The communication status between Magnifi and the Ectane is known from the icons located in the status bar at the lower right corner of the screen lc A temperature indicator is displayed when the connection is established This represents the internal temperature of the instrument Does not work with third party equipme
264. rns that the pointer movement is invalid Move the pointer to another place or release the mouse button to cancel the current action Increases or decreases the area covered inside the cursors Changes to previous next frequency for the same coil Changes to previous next coil in the same frequency Changes to previous value Not linked 1 9 Linked H Hyperlink Changes to next value Not linked 1 9 Linked H Hyperlink Opens a list of available links Click any to select Changes to previous next channel that is on this label 328 In Lissajous Views Table D 2 Mouse and keyboard functions tr Channel list Left click rt Displays a list of channels Click any to select Channel name Left click i Changes to previous channel in list Channel name Right click l Changes to next channel in list tr Data type Left click h Display a list to choose the data type Scale value Left click ve Change to previous scale in list Scale value Right click Change to next scale in list Scale value Middle click E Opens a list of voltage values Click any to select Scale value Left click vertical drag Increases Decreases the voltage value Signal area Left click drag s Moves the data representation inside the Lissajous Signal area Left click k Centers data in the Lissajous Signal area Hold CTRL 5 Rotates data in the Lissajous left click drag Signal area Right click drag E C
265. rop down list select the C scan on which you want to base your new C scan 3 Click OK The Build from C scan process is configured Managing C scans 166 Configuring the Mixing Process The Mixing process which is mostly used for tube inspections allows you to remove unwanted signals noise by subtracting one C scan C scan 2 from another C scan 1 It can also be used effectively with array probes in specific circumstances To configure the Mixing process 1 Once you have selected the process from the Add Data Processing window see Figure 3 106 the Mixing Setup window appears Figure 3 109 The Mixing Setup window Note r a Mixing Setup C scan 1 C scan 2 Reference Mixing axis Cire Number of coefficients 2 Single coefficient Cancel Details gt gt 2 Inthe C scan 1 drop down list select the C scan from which C scan 2 will be subtracted 3 In the C scan 2 drop down list select the C scan that will be subtracted from C scan 1 4 Inthe Reference drop down list either select an existing reference created in the Calibration Points dialog box see Managing Calibration Points on page 209 or enter the name of a new one newly entered references will be added to the Calibration Points list 5 Indicate the axis in which you want to display the data in the Mixing axis drop down list Usually this is the scan axis 6 In the Number of coefficients
266. s X and Y axes This only affects how data is displayed is has no effect on the scan itself The C scan orientation section al LF C scan orientation al Configuring Scan Parameters 138 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 In the Polar raster scan section configure basic scan parameters In the Get position from drop down list Encoders is selected You have no other choice Check the Absolute Encoders box if necessary The Polar raster scan section Polar raster scan Get position from Encoder W Absolute Encoders Encoder trigger Pals Y as Enc Theta Enc Radius C scan In the Encoder trigger subsection select the appropriate encoder for the X and Y axes In the C scan subsection define the range of values used to display C scans in a data pane The scan subsection scan Circumferential anis Axial asis From 0 000 deg 20 0000 mm Size 360 000 deg Size 150 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 500 deg smpl Grid resolution aso romsmpl a Under the Circumferential axis column enter the scan starting point in degrees in the From field b Enter the resolution that you want to use for your grid the number of degrees covered to constitute a sample in the Grid resolution field c Under the Axial axis column enter the starting radius of the inspected area in the field d Enter the external radius of the polar scan in the Size field e Enter the resolution that you want to use for your
267. s are within the requested percentage of tolerance activate Frequency tolerance If necessary to automatically optimize the phase and amplitude to the maximum injection frequency click Optimize Appendix C 319 Defining Raw Channel Parameters The Raw Channels tab see Figure C 8 allows you to specify the configuration of each raw unprocessed channel Figure G 8 The TC7700 MS5800 Channels dialog box Raw Channels tab Channels leal Global Generator Raw Channels Timeslot 1 Timeslot 2 Bal Freq Enable Name Freq Enable Input1 None _ 96000 v V R_DIF Fi 96000 Input1 None _y 48000 v V RDIF F2 48000 T Input1 None _ 24000 E L 24000 v V R_DIF F3 Input1 None _ 6000 v o M RDIF F4 46 Input 2 Spa Zo asa Jae pt en haoo Z RAsst2 es jaooo amooo A fs Input 2 6 100 24000 z fv RAB 46 1000 Input 2 oe a Ee ed Input 3 None o Demod009 Cb01 42 96000 v Demod009 Ct02 42 Input 3 None v 48000 Demod010 Cb01 42 48000 Demod010 Ct02 42 Input 3 None v 24000 v Demod011 Cb01 42 24000 Demod011 C02 42 Input3 None _vf6000 Demod012 Cb01 42 6000 Demod012 Cb02 42 Mux Selection by input 1 EC 4p 2 EC v 3 ECT v 4 ECT X To do so 1 If necessary click the or next to the appropriate Timeslot to expand or collapse the view of the timeslot 2 For
268. s of the cursor uses the data points located at the selection cursor ends to perform the measurements Data inside the cursors is ignored Horizontal uses only the horizontal component Peak to peak uses a combination of horizontal and vertical components PP First transition uses the combination of the vertical and horizontal component of the first transition Vertical uses only the vertical component 6 On the Phase list select the phase measurement method that you want to use Absolute uses a straight line from the zero position to the main cursor Absolute Peak uses a straight line from the zero position to the peak value of the data selection Ends of the cursor uses the data points located at the selection cursor ends to perform the measurements Data inside the cursors is ignored Inverted ends of the cursor uses the baseline from the top cursor Maximum rate used to measure the phase between the two points of greatest variation in the Lissajous Peak to peak used to measure the phase between the two farthest points extremities of the steepest section of the Lissajous PP First transition used to measure the phase between the two farthest points extremities of the steepest section on the first transition of the Lissajous 7 Inthe Gain limit section enter the minimum and maximum gain that you want to apply when rotating the signal 8 Click OK The Scale processing unit
269. s the coil to which belongs the displayed data For more information on coil numbers see Setting Displayed Channel C scan Information on page 78 Allows you to link views For more information see Linking Views on page 61 27 28 Projection Views Figure 1 28 Projection views top longitudinal left circumferential right cylindrical T 63mm COR COR v 10 30 mm ID 12 18 mm OD 1 87 mm WT 28 0 WL 0 2420 m ext 149mm I 7 0mm al oo COR COR 10 27 mm ID 12 90 mm OD 2 63 mm WT 0 0 WL 180 0 ext Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 29 Elements of a Projection View Projection views are used specifically with IRIS inspections All projection views are presented the same way with the same elements as displayed below Figure 1 29 The projection view management bar 1 2 3 4 U TMT E T 7 en or t 0 0mm T 35 4mm FE WT 1 96 mm WL 29 1 aaa _ 6 Table 1 10 Description of the projection view management bar items 1 Information Allows you to display or hide information fields relevant to your inspection field project For more information on information fields see Configuring Information customization Fields on page 59 button 2 Information Information fields giving specific data that you want to monitor in real time for fields more information see Configuring Information Fields on page 59 3 Rotation Rotates the cylinder projecti
270. scan surface inspection array probe section configure your basic scan parameters In the Get position from drop down list Encoders is selected You have no other choice Check the Absolute Encoders box if necessary This option allows you to use negative and positive position values The Raster scan surface inspection array probe section Raster scan surface inspection armay probe Get position from Encoder Absolute Encoders Encodertrigger Pane Y anis Encoder kd Encoder r kd C scan In the Encoder trigger subsection select the appropriate encoder for the X and Y axes In the C scan subsection define the range of values used to display C scans in a data pane The scan subsection C scan A aMIg anis From 0 0000 mm ooo 8 mm Size 2000 000 mm 2000 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 5000 mmn ampl 0 5000 mm smpl a Inthe From fields enter the starting point for the C scan display on the X and Y axes based on the size of the piece under test b Inthe Size fields enter the end point for the C scan display on the X and Y axes based on the size of the piece under test Normally the value entered in this field is the total size of the piece under test c Inthe Grid resolution columns enter the length and width of each sample on the grid Click OK when you are done setting up your scan parameters Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to the Magnifi application Click Cancel to disc
271. se the dialog box by clicking the close button in the top right corner Viewing Legacy Setup Info To view setup information for your legacy unit select Settings gt Acquisition Setup gt Info The Info dialog box appears Figure G 10 The TC7700 MS5800 Info window Info X Inquiry General Board Generator qty 8 Demodulator qty 49048 Loading Fault Wam up MIM identification 0 PIM identification 0 Board Board number 14 Board ID 0 Balancing Fault Temperature Raw data HP Equipment state Done Acquisition qty Software version Main OK Serial port Piggyback Piggyback ID 0 Receive qty 0 oo Baud rate In that dialog box the following information is displayed 1 Inthe Format sub section a The Setup info box indicates the number of setups sent to the test unit since the last startup b Inthe Board text box enter the number of the board for which you want information c Inthe Board group box Raw data and Raw data HP info boxes indicate the number of bytes used per channel Appendix C 323 2 In the Error sub section the info box presents error codes generated by the test unit Click Erase to remove all displayed errors 3 In the Inquiry sub section a The Generator qty info box indicates the number of generators found in the test unit b The MIM identification info box indicates the MIM multipurpose interface module found in the test unit c The Demodulator qty info box indicates the number of demodu
272. section select the number of coefficients applied to the signals Eddyfi suggests applying four coefficients The higher the number of coefficients applied the more effective the signal removal You should use less coefficients only if the signals that you want to keep become too distorted The Single coefficient check box is normally used with surface array probes to apply the same coefficient to all channels 7 Click OK The Mixing process is configured Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 167 Configuring the Scale Process The Seale process allows you to define the phase angle and amplitude at which a reference signal will be adjusted during the calibration process To configure the Scale process 1 Once you have selected the process from the Add Data Processing window see Figure 3 106 the Scaling Setup window appears Figure 3 110 The Scaling Setup window a Scaling Setup Amplitude Reference Measurement method Peak to peak Phase Reference Measurement method Peak to peak Orientation Reference Scaling axis Circ Single gain phase Assisted array calibration Cancel Details gt gt 2 Inthe Amplitude section a Enter the amplitude in volts at which you want to set the reference signal b Inthe Reference drop down list select the calibration point on which to base this modified amplitude c Inthe Measurement method drop down list select the measurement method t
273. sincronisme a a N 252 On the Acquisition Notepad biisii a ai 252 Commenting ON Specific Files ccsccesessssescsscseussscnesssseueresseueususeueususeueususeuersuseueususenersusenens 253 Analyzing amp Reporting Data Ee 255 Setting Analysis Preferences ssscccsssssssscccssssseeccessnsseeccenscssseeecenscsnseecenccssseeenennsseseeens 256 Opening Inspection Projects sssscccsssssssecccssssseeeccessnssseeccencesseeecenscessesecenenssssseeennsseees 257 Loading S tup Files csaiccescecencieccuns cicieavdesansiacatueduaivadsuasasnaiewsecdeuueaatucsusswaccccassstuecucuseeanees 258 Loading Existing Setup Files ccccsssseccsssseeesseeeeesseeeeeeseeeeessateeeseeatessesaeseseatasessateeesaeesy 258 Loading Recently Used Setup Files seasseeesneeeenenennnnunennenenunsnnununnnuuneenunnnnunnnnnsnnnnnnenunnennnnnnnnn 259 Loading Original Setup Files cccsccccesseccsseeccsseeeeesseeeeceeeeeeceeeseceteeeesaeeesatesesateeeseatesy 259 REANO DAE al cho a Ri a ea oo eee 259 Changing Saved Data Directories cccccccsssccccsseeeesseeeeesseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesseeeeesstesessaeeeeeatess 260 Measuring indications ssssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 261 Positioning Data for Selection ccccccessecssssecceseeeesseeeesesseeeeesetasecsatesesatessatasesatesessatesens 261 Selecting Data in Strip Charts caia a A 262 Measuring Data in Lissajous and Voltage Plane
274. ssecessseecesssteceseeeesesetessssetessesetesecsutesssseteeenees 233 Adjusting the Target Pin Gate sonnin an a ai 234 Adjusting the Front Wall Gate cccccccsssecsssssccsssseeeesseeeeesseeeeesseeeeecseeeeesseeeseseeeesateeeseaeess 235 Agjusting the Back Wall Gale wcities a HOG KARA eee 236 Validating Defect Detection cccccccsscsssssssssscssussscnsesssensussueneussueueussueueussueneusaueneusauenensuaenens 237 Cali ating Systems cisiccicsades ccdecieecenciecidvaduniceteaananeeccdusiincteduntesscniecieacsanaaceduuianuddexcunscsiues 238 CAME AUN Gs GIANG S sirara a anced aSeaans Soseanen aa seares dae S 238 calibrating Gres O72 Loaner etre re men eon eae oR eo EA A 240 Calibrating Landmarks ccccceeccccsssseecsseeeecsseeeecesetececsetececsateseceteseeatesesaeeeeeatesesateeesatesy 242 calibrating ARIO siina a 244 Opening Inspection Projects sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 246 Creating Inspection LISUS snsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 248 I REC OTORIEL FONIMAL sc baveetvnccdnrcnecsaraviee Sasavegeranevadettaravadevensatereresatevetevetasntevetershiutanceateammenterateaes 248 In Zone ROW GOIN FORMAL iran A 249 Performing ACQUISITIONS ssis aniani aaa anaana aana 250 Displaying the Large Acquisition WiINGOW ccccccsssccceesssseeeeessseeeeesssseeeeeessseeeseessateeeesss 251 Adding Notes
275. starting point for the C scan display based on the size of the piece under test c Inthe Size field under the Axial axis column enter the end point for the C scan display based on the size of the piece under test Normally the value entered in this field is the total size of the piece under test d By default the display resolution on the axial axis is calculated automatically If the value indicated is not the one that you expected uncheck the Automatic axial display resolution box This activates the Display resolution field under the Axial axis column Enter the required resolution in that field 9 Click OK when you are done setting up your scan parameters Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to the Magnifi application Click Cancel to discard all the modifications that you made Configuring Scan Parameters 122 For 2D Surface Raster Scans Single Channel To set up scan parameters for 2D single channel surface raster scans 1 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings menu The Scan Parameters window appears Figure 3 58 The Scan Parameters window for 2D single channel surface raster scans Scan type Acquisition rate gt Linear single axis scan bobbin Sampling clock Internal clock Tube bore Requested 800 0000 Hz Rotating probe Actual 800 Hz gt Array probe Rotating array probe 2D surface can C scan orientation Single channel raster scan y
276. t Encoders is selected You have no other choice Check the Absolute Encoders box if necessary This option allows you to use negative and positive position values In the Encoder trigger subsection select the appropriate encoder for the X and Y axes In the C scan subsection define the range of values used to display C scans in a data pane The G scan subsection C ecari ranle aris From 0 0000 mm 0 0000 mm Size 2000 0000 mm 1000 0000 mm Grid resolution 0 5000 mmsmpl 0 5000 ron srnpal a Inthe From fields enter the starting point for the C scan display on the X and Y axes based on the size of the piece under test b Inthe Size fields enter the end point for the C scan display on the X and Y axes based on the size of the piece under test Normally the value entered in this field is the total size of the piece under test c Inthe Grid resolution columns enter the length and width of each sample on the grid Click OK when you are done setting up your scan parameters Scan parameters are saved the Scan Parameters window closes and you return to the Magnifi application Click Cancel to discard all the modifications that you made Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 125 For 2D Surface Scans with Single Pass Array Probes To set up scan parameters for 2D surface scans with single pass array probes 1 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings menu The Scan Parameters window appears Figure 3 63 The
277. t From the drop down list you can select Internal Clock External Clock or any of the encoders defined in the previous step If you selected Internal Clock enter the acquisition rate for that clock in the Rate field If you selected External Clock enter the maximum acquisition rate for that clock in the Maximum rate field If you selected a predefined encoder you have to select the direction of the scan from the Direction drop down list Up and Down Up Down the maximum speed of the probe in unit of distance per second in the Maximum probe speed field and the density of the acquisition in number of samples per unit of distance in the Density field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Applied field Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 87 2 Inthe Naming subsection decide how raw channels will be named by selecting Value or Index from the Frequency drop down list The resulting channel naming convention is displayed in the Resulting Channel Name field 3 If you want to deactivate the driver when there is no on going acquisition check the Disable drivers at the acquisition step box This is useful to save batteries and to reduce heat on probes that require high drive voltage such as RF
278. t you have to convert the setup file first Note Only parts of the original TC7700 and MS5800 setup files are converted Features not supported by the Ectane instrument alarms group managers data compression report previews and probe state are not taken into account At the time of writing the only parameters kept are the channel encoder and I O data To do so 1 Select Load Setup from the File menu A standard Open dialog box appears 2 Browse through this dialog box until you find the acquisition setup file set that you want 3 Select the file and click Open The setup file loads in Magnifi Loading Setup Files 222 4 From the Settings menu select Acquisition Setup gt Convert to Ectane Figure 4 5 Selecting Convert to Ectane Operation Layouts Special Help d g v Preferences te a B ca Acq Scan Parameters L ReFacooa Acquisition Setup i Channels cta C Scans A Alarms Indication Codes Group Manager mati Calibration Points YO Pa Depth Curves E Encoder th Cle Info aa ne Options 5 In the Magnifi dialog box that appears click Yes to continue Figure 4 6 The Magnifi confirmation dialog box Setup conversion to Ectane format This operation can not be undone Do you want to continue Lvs J Le 6 Once the conversion is complete a Conversion Result dialog box appears Important Read the content of the Conversion R
279. t affect the display of C scans the following message will pop up Simply click the message to make it go away Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 105 For Linear Single Axis Scans To set up scan parameters for linear single axis scans i e with bobbin probes 1 Select Scan Parameters from the Settings menu or double click Scan parameters in the Setup tab The Scan Parameters window appears Figure 3 33 The Scan Parameters window for linear single axis scans Scan type Acquisition rate Linear single axiz scan bobbin Sampling clack Internal clack T Tube bore Requested 800 0000 Hz i Rotating probe Actual ant Hz 0 Aray probe Rotating array probe 2D surtace scan G Single channel raster scan 0 Single pass aray probe 0 Aray probe raster scan 6 Polar array scan Polar raster scan Linear single axis scan no available C can Strip chart Get position from Acquisition clack ka Time Distance Sample i 100 Encoder trigger Vertical scale 5 r Direction mmis Probe speed FOO 0000 Up A Down Acquisition density 1 6000 empl rom Acquisition resolution 0 6250 mm smpl Configuring Scan Parameters 106 2 Inthe Scan type section select Linear single axis scan bobbin When you make your selection the bottom part of the Scan Parameters window changes to show parameters relevant to this type of scan 3 In the Acquisition rate section select how the acquisition
280. t coil in the same frequency Changes to previous value Not linked 1 9 Linked H Hyperlink 334 Table D 4 Mouse and keyboard functions continued Link views Link views Label Right click Middle click Left click Right click Left click Left click Left click Left click i Changes to next value Not linked 1 9 Linked H Hyperlink Opens a list of available links Click any to select Changes to previous next channel that is on this label Increases decreases the X Y ratio the zoom and the pitch value Changes the rotation configuration Changes the surface color configuration Increases Decreases the rotation the surface grid and the view Appendix D 335 In Side Views Table D 5 Mouse and keyboard functions tr or X or Y Left click Displays a list of channels or C scans Click any to select Channel name Left click Changes to previous channel in list Channel name Right click Changes to next channel in list LT Left click Toggles the view between horizontal and vertical amplitude atr Data type Left click Displays a list to choose the data type Frequency Coil Left click Right click Left click Right click Changes to previous next frequency for the same coil Changes to previous next coil in the same frequency Link views Left click Changes previous value Not linked 1 9 Li
281. ta As Create Inspection Project Manage Inspection Project Recent Files C Users PSAMSO 1 QTE AppData Local Temp Magnifi default magsetup Exit Alt F4 L C Users psamson QTEC Documents Magnifi Setup RFT_DualDriver_2F magsetup 7 7 Loading Original Setup Files When loading a data file from the Analysis tab you can load the original setup a recorded with this data by making sure that the Readback with current setup button is not selected Note This button is selected by default When loading the file while this button is not selected Magnifi will use the setup that you had when the data was recorded Once the file is loaded the Readback with current setup button is automatically selected so that you keep this setup the next time that you read the file Reading Data Files To read data files 1 Select a file from the Analysis tab 2 Click Start or press F2 to read the file If the data is not compatible with the currently loaded setup the Compatible setups window appears Loading Setup Files 260 Figure 5 5 The Compatible setups window Compatible setups ea RFT_DualDriver_2F magsetup RFT_SingleDriver_2F magsetup Original Setup Cancel From this window you can Apply the original setup by clicking Original Setup Select one of the displayed setup and click Load Browse through your directories to find a compatible setup by cli
282. ta in view Changes to previous next frequency for the same coil Changes to previous next coil in the same frequency Changes to previous value Not linked 1 9 Linked H Hyperlink Changes to next value Not linked 1 9 Linked H Hyperlink Opens a list of available links Click any to select Reduce rotation by 1 Increases rotation by 1 Shows Data History dialog Changes rotation 330 Table D 2 Mouse and keyboard functions continued Label Left click Right click i Changes to previous next channel that is on this label Vpp Vi Vr Vpf Left click Right click Ji Toggles between measurement modes Vpp for peak to peak Vi for vertical maximum Vr for horizontal maximum and Vpf for peak first peak to peak first transition pp mr pr Left click Right click Ji Toggles between measurement modes pp for peak to peak mr for maximum rate pf for horizontal maximum and Vpf for peak first peak to peak first transition Appendix D 331 In G scan and Polar Views Table D 3 Mouse and keyboard functions Channel name Channel name m 1 Signal area Signal area Signal area Anywhere Signal area Signal area On the subtraction cursor Signal area On the subtraction cursor Frequency In C scan and Polar Views Left click Left click Right click Left click Left click Left click Right click drag
283. tally or vertically are NOT resizable are dependent on the original pane and all show the same view Splitting Panes in Four To split a pane in four 1 From the Layout toolbar click the Split in both directions button 2 Position the cursor over the pane that you want to split The cursor changes to this Figure 1 43 The Split in both directions cursor his 3 Click in the pane The pane is split in four with the same data displayed in all panes Note Panes created with a Split button horizontally vertically or in both directions are independent resizable and the view in each can be modified Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Splitting Panes in Any Number of Rows and Columns To split a pane in any number of rows and columns 1 Figure 1 44 Figure 1 45 From the Layout toolbar click the Multi split in both directions button The Multi split in both directions window appears The Multi split in both directions window Multi split in both directions How many rows do you want to create 2 4 g How many columns do you want to create 2 4 3 cence In the first text box enter the number of rows that you want to create between 2 and 4 In the second text box enter the number of columns that you want to create between 2 and 4 Position the cursor over the pane that you want to split The cursor changes to this The Split in both directions cursor MBs Click in the pane The
284. te in Hz that you want to use in the Requested field In certain circumstances because of limitations of the connected instrument the acquisition rate that you request might be unreachable The software will then automatically calculate the closest possible rate and indicate the calculated rate in the Actual field c Ifyou chose External clock the Requested field is inactive but the Max acquisition rate field appears where you instruct the external clock about the maximum acquisition rate in Hz that you want to use d If you chose a preset encoder you have to enter the requested acquisition rate in the Requested field and the maximum acquisition rate in the Max acquisition rate field Note Depending on how the encoder is defined acquisition rate measurement units might differ from the ones you selected for the application in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box see Setting Measurement Units on page 738 4 In the C scan orientation section select the button representing the orientation that you want to use for C scans X and Y axes This only affects how data is displayed is has no effect on the scan itself Figure 3 54 The C scan orientation section C scan orientation eT Al LF Important In a tube bore configuration the X axis represents the circumference while the Y axis represents the length of the tube Configuring Scan Parameters 120 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 In the Tube bore
285. tect the probe enter the minimum frequency and maximum amplitude allowed in the Minimum frequency allowed and Maximum amplitude allowed fields of the Probe Protection section 9 Enter the name and prefix of the channel group in the Name and Prefix column of the Channel Groups section 10 Enter the frequency amplitude and phase of your probe in the Frequencies and Injections section 11 Once you are done entering the topology window click Finish Your Ectane is now properly configured Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups 100 Configuring Ectane IRIS Acquisition Setups Note Before configuring your scan parameters for use with IRIS probes you must configure the hardware that will use them As of this writing Magnifi only supports acquisitions via Eddyfi s Ectane instrument Magnifi can neither work with existing MS5800 IRIS setups nor convert them for use with the Ectane The following pages explain how to configure your hardware to perform IRIS acquisitions Configuring an acquisition setup for the Ectane instrument is performed through the Application Wizard that guides you step by step in entering all the relevant information regarding your setup The following pages explain the various steps provided by the wizard To access the Application Wizard in the Settings menu select Application Wizard The Application Wizard window opens Figure 3 28 The Application Wizard window a 4 Applica
286. ted according to the defined sort order From the report status right click anywhere in the report status and select Sort from the contextual menu that appears The entries are sorted according to the defined sort order Defining a Sort Order To define a sort order 1 From the Report window click Options or right click anywhere on the list in the Report window or report status and select Options from the contextual menu that appears The Options window opens 2 Select the Sort tab Managing Reports 284 Figure 5 33 Figure 5 34 Important 4 The Sort tab of the Options window aa Options General Columns Sort Column Tube ID Index Depth Code Channel C Scan File name HHH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH OH Organize the order in which values are sorted by placing the cursor over the double arrow next to the column title The cursor changes to this Cursor used when moving values for sorting in a report Once the cursor has the shape shown in Figure 5 34 click and drag the column title to the place where you want it in the list In the example on Figure 5 38 Tube IDs are sorted first then indication event number indication depth etc Eddyfi recommends sorting by file name You can choose to sort the values in each column in ascending order descending order or in no particular order To select an order double click under Dir next to the column ID that you want to sort
287. ted channels in the Enabled column Click OK when you are done To enable all channels From the Settings menu select Acquisition Setup gt Enable Disable Channels or click the Enable disable channels button in the Acquisition Setup toolbar The Enable Disable Channels window appears Click the Enable all filtered channel s button to send all channels in the Enabled column Click OK when you are done Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 141 Browsing Ectane Setup Information ET Once you have configured a setup or opened a setup file you can browse through all the setup information from the Setup Information window To access that information window select Acquisition Setup gt Setup Information from the Settings menu or click the Setup information button The Setup Information window appears Figure 3 84 The Setup Information window Setup information Uhannel G2 Channel Name h Frequency eee lopai Uia irr G2 chanel a ChanneliGroup Aiai 3 chorus TIFAOAN AM MM kH Topology TIFSO0AD3 an DOD kHz TIFAO ROMII kHz TIFOS 800 000 kHz TIDA BOO kHz E TFSOO4D 800 000 kHz TIFA 800 000 kHz TIFA 800 000 kHz TIF S004 DO 800 000 kHz TIFANI B00 000 kHz TiFEOOAT2 HAM KHz T1FaOOAT HL IAM KHz 800 000 kHz T1FEOOATS HMMM KHz TF E0041 HMMM KHz TiFEOOATY HMMM KHz T1FSDOS LE HIM MM KAZ TIFAGGATS A MM kH TIFAO AM MM kH TIFA AM MM kH TIFAO AM MM kH TIFAO
288. test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 18000 mm 213 75 4 5000 mm 211 test_jung2 Cire ECA Encircling 172800 mm 253 25 70 500 mm 7 53 221 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 172800 mm 102 50 3 0000 mm 8 40 37 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 172800 mm 120 50 2 0000 mm 3 83 212 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 176400 21600 mm 139 75 1 5000 mm 3 82 212 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 172800 mm 162 50 1 0000 mm 12 23 35 test_jung2 Cire ECA Encircling 270000 93600 mm 204 25 9 5000 mm 12 45 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 93600 86400 mm 204 50 7 0000 mm 11 88 28 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 176400 93600 mm 213 50 6 0000 mm 4 00 59 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 331200 43200 mm 213 00 4 0000 mm 4 86 236 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 18000 50400 mm 213 75 4 5000 mm 6 10 211 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 172800 360000 mm 253 25 70 500 mm 7 53 221 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 172800 28800 mm 102 50 3 0000 mm 8 40 37 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 172800 28800 mm 120 50 2 0000 mm 3 83 212 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 176400 21600 mm 139 75 1 5000 mm 3 82 212 test_jung2 Circ ECA Encircling 172800 14400 mm 162 50 1 0000 mm Insert Insert Copy Delete Delete All Edit Sort Print Options Boor v Header J 2 Right click anywhere in the report A contextual menu appears 3 From the contextual menu select Display profiles Managing Reports 272 Figure 5 17 Selecting Display Profiles from the contextual menu A En
289. th the mouse move the red gate over the front wall signal see Figure 4 18 4 If needed adjust the gain so that the front wall echo amplitude is about 100 of the screen height slightly saturated see Figure 4 18 5 Adjust the level of the gate to about 25 of the maximum signal amplitude see Figure 4 18 6 Probe centering is not always perfect Because of that echoes may move in position along the time axis of the A scan Adjust the width of the gate to make sure that the echo is properly detected regardless of its position along the time AXIS 7 Once the gate is set properly the internal diameter should be well displayed in the projection view see Figure 4 18 Figure 4 18 Adjusting the front wall gate uy Megnifi 5 28279 olusers ngrenserqtecwocuments magni setups demomageetup file View Settings Gperstion Layouts Special Help an tF P BB T oy Be Be ojs eS 00 0 6 ae 2 Ji taiim fon COR F Lal On Setup r ah WT 2 mm WRIS Dar erupts Sato Fl sutes ate ering Sosi pao Siig aurret Prespas channels z or E120 men T iimm W272 mm WOO ID 0mm OD 2 4mm dA ne OD Cok COR E Pip 89mm PWE beens BW I253 mm Bat Ades WT Sem WE 10e 3 PDL 21 55 men AR Ewkwal kea Frreice Sop Genel fams yam iE Dti Y pj ao es dds sa Terai 200000 Y inp Fitter 4324 MHI i Archheaion Yes i Y p Him Tas I Scale 30 ampl RPS 76 Or nre MB
290. the TSP Figure 4 14 Drawing a vector S TTR 06 gt aT Oa I pp wl pv AD BLG BLG v 128Vpp 31 pp ext 55 6 74S 5 Click the Normalization button at the bottom of the voltage plane view This adjusts the rotation gain and translation along the X and Y axes to bring the nominal tube signal at the bottom of the skin depth spiral and the tip of the TSP at zero vr Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions Figure 4 15 Results from a normalization arj asti arel oo ETE ABS F1 Dmae Storing Nominal Tube Response To store the nominal tube response 1 Perform a normalization see Normalization on page 229 2 Click the Store nominal button at the bottom of the voltage plane view The current normalization settings are stored and the tracking of the angle correction begins it will be performed every time a new normalization is performed 3 To see the correct angle tracking information select Automatic Measurements from the Operation menu or click the Automatic Measurements button from the Analysis toolbar Performing RFT Specific Tasks 231 232 Figure 4 16 Angle correction Angle correction 0 5 4 To return to the stored nominal settings click Return to Nominal icon Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 233 Performing IRIS specific Tasks Once you have loaded or created a valid IRIS setup for the tube you need to inspect see
291. the Prefix fields under the appropriate column Enter the frequency amplitude and phase for each channel group that you need To add frequencies click Add at the bottom of the Channel Groups section This adds a new data line maximum of five under the first where you can also enter the proper frequency amplitude and phase Once you are done entering the topology window click Finish Your Ectane is now properly configured Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Configuring DefHi Single Row Topologies To configure DefHi single row topology array parameters Figure 3 23 DefHi single row topology array parameters Instrument Configuration Wizard Encoders Sea Erai DefHiSingleRow T1 l Topologies Parameters for the selected topology E DefHiSingleRow T1 Connector ECA Aray Bobbin Total coil quantity 30 Channel Groups r Circ 12 Pole spacing Enabled 7 Gain 58 dB Prefix C Chanel prefix T Frequency kHz Amplitude V Phase deg _ Resulting Channel Name 2 50 A oo i x T1F800C001 Probe Protection Minimum Freguency Allowed 100 kHz Maximum Amplitude Allowed 8 00 V Add Cancel lt lt Back Finish 1 In the Total coil quantity text box type the number of coils in your probe The Pole spacing list is always configured to 12 for DefHi probes 2 In the Gain text box type the required gain 3 In the Channel prefix text box type a channel prefix The resulting channel
292. the filter order that you want to filter out 6 Click OK The Filter Setup dialog box disappears and the Filter process is configured Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 171 Deleting C scan Processes To delete a process select it from the Process list and click Delete The selected process disappears from the list of C scan processes Note Processes that must be present to start a C scan process Build from channels Build from C scan Mixing etc cannot be deleted Ordering C scan Processes To change the position of a process in the list of C scan processes select the process to move and click Up or Down until it reaches the position that you want in the list Note Processes that must be present to start a C scan process Build from channels Build from C scan Mixing etc cannot be moved to another position in the list Deleting C scans To delete an entire C scan 1 With a data file open either select C scans from the Settings menu or double click C scan in the Setup tab The C scan Configuration window appears Figure 3 114 The C scan Configuration window a a C Scan Configuration C Scan CF1 Process CF1 New State Processing Type Details Add CF2 Build from channel CF3 Delete Delete Scale CF4 Rename Duplicate Import Interpolation Export 2 In the C scan list on the left select the C scan to delete and click Delete The C sca
293. ting Reports Magnifi allows you to export your reports in various common formats Exporting is performed from the Report window To export a report 1 Select Edit Report from the Operation menu or click Edit report from the Analysis toolbar The Report window appears Figure 5 36 The Report window 5 S Report C Users PSamson QTEC Documents Magnifi Data Repor mdb W v 11 88 4 00 4 86 6 10 7 53 8 40 3 83 3 82 12 23 12 45 11 88 4 00 4 86 6 10 7 53 8 40 3 83 3 82 Deg 28 59 236 211 221 37 212 212 35 28 59 236 211 221 37 212 212 Code test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 test_jung2 Channel C Scan Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ Circ File name ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling ECA Encircling X pos 176400 331200 18000 172800 172800 172800 176400 172800 270000 93600 176400 331200 18000 172800 172800 172800 176400 172800 28800 21600 14400 X axis units mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
294. tion define the resolution parameters that will be used during acquisitions The Resolution check subsection Resolution check Axial asis Minimum density 2 popp ampl mm Probe speed 1000 0000 mmis Acquisition density 4 0000 smpl mm Acquisition resolution 0 2500 roim smpl Maximum probe speed 000 0000 mms C scan In the Minimum density field enter the number of samples that you want to take per unit of distance In the Probe speed field enter the speed in in s or mm s at which the probe will travel along both axes Once all this data is entered Magnifi calculates acquisition density and resolution as well as the maximum probe speed Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 117 8 In the C scan subsection define the range of values used to display C scans in a data pane Figure 3 51 The C scan subsection L scar Circumferential axis Axial axis From 0 deg 0 0000 mm Size 360 deg 000 0000 mrm Display resolutions 2 0000 deg smpl 0 2500 rin stnpl Automatic axial display resolution OF Cancel a Inthe Display resolution field under the Circumferential axis column enter the angle variation required between samples b Inthe From field under the Axial axis column enter the starting point for the C scan display based on the size of the piece under test c Inthe Size field under the Axial axis column enter the end point for the C scan display based on the size of the piece under test Norma
295. tion Wizard Setup Information Modify Current Setup Create New Setup File Name Folder Location C Users P Samson QTEC Documents Magnifi Setu Equipment o Ectane Name Type Unit Resolution Filter External i 1 Encoder 1 Quadrature imm 1 000 countimm No Filter v None 2 Encoder 2 Quadrature imm 1 000countimm No Filter v None i 3 Encoder 3 Quadrature imm 1 000 countimm No Filter v None Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 101 Configuring General IRIS Parameters When the Application Wizard appears the General page is selected From there you select an inspection setup the equipment used test instrument and encoders as well as the technology used only IRIS is available in version 3 8 Figure 3 29 The General page of the Application Wizard window J Application Wizard General IRIS Application Definition Set general parameters Setup Information Modify Current Setup Create New Setup File Name Folder Location C Users P Samson QTEC Documents Magnifi Setu Equipment Ectane Name Type Unit Resolution Filter 1_ Encoder 1 Quadrature imm 1 000 countmm No Filter y None 2 Encoder 2 Quadrature imm 1 000countimm No Filter i None 3 Encoder 3 Quadrature imm 1 000countmm No Filter v None Next gt gt Finish To do so 1 In the Setup Informa
296. tion section select whether you want to modify the setup currently loaded default or create a new one Note The Modify Current Setup option is only available if the current setup is compatible with IRIS inspections a To create a new setup select Create New Setup The File Name and Folder Location text fields become active b Enter the name of the setup in the File Name field c Select the location where you want to save this setup by clicking Browse and then finding that location the location selected by default is the folder where all other predefined setups are saved 2 In the Equipment section select the instrument that you will use for your IRIS inspection in version 3 3 of the software only the Ectane is available 3 Inthe Technology section select the inspection technology that you want to use in version 3 3 of the software only IRIS is available 4 Check the box at the beginning of the encoder line to activate that encoder configuration Configuring Ectane IRIS Acquisition Setups 102 10 11 12 13 Click Encoder n under the Name column and enter the name that you want to give to your encoder Make sure that you give your encoder a name that will be meaningful to all users In the Type column select the type of the encoder For more information on the types of encoders see Configuring Encoders and Digital Inputs on page 82 In the Unit column select the appropriate measurement unit mm
297. ty that it does not create signal distortion Note The wider the window high number of samples the less efficient the high pass filter will be To configure the Median Filter process 1 Once you have selected the process from the Add Data Processing window see Figure 3 106 the Median Filter Setup window appears Figure 3 111 The Median Filter Setup window Filter direction Axial Window size 0 63 1 A Median Filter Setup Circumferential mm smpl Fitler type Low pass High pass v Output same size as Input v Lissajous plot enhancement 2 Inthe Filter direction section select the direction in which the filter will perform Circumferential or Axial or X or Y depending on scan parameters Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 169 3 In the Filter type section select whether you want to apply a low pass or high pass filter Using the low pass filter allows you to keep slow variation signals long defects lift off while using the high pass filter allows you to keep fast variation signals sharp defects such as cracks notches and pits 4 In the Window size section enter the number of samples that should constitute the window or the size of the window in mm or degrees The number of samples must be an odd number 5 If you want the median filter output to be the same size as the data input select Output same size as Input This adds points at the be
298. u can also select one from the Create New Layout sub menu 2 Select Modify Layout from the Layouts menu The Modify Layouts window appears 3 In the window all recently used layouts are listed In the Default column select the layout that you want to use as default Figure 1 47 The Modify Layouts window Medify Lanrouts i Actwe Name Default Be Chote Oy feck Up eb Reload copy From now on the layout that you have designed will load automatically as default when you launch Magnifi Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 39 Removing Layouts from the List To remove layouts from the list 1 Select Modify Layout from the Layouts menu The Modify Layouts window appears see Figure 1 47 2 Click the red X next to the layout name that you want to remove from the list The layout is removed from the list Managing Layouts 40 Managing Views Magnifi allows you to decide how your acquired data will be displayed Configuring Views Colors Magnifi comes standard with five preset color schemes Color schemes affect the colors used in the data display area To select a color scheme 1 From the Settings menu select Preferences You can also click Preferences from the General toolbar The Preferences window appears 2 Click the Display tab Figure 1 48 The Display tab a 440 III Z Preferences K Views color scheme Strip Chart Current scheme White Time Distance Background Vertical scal
299. u to select a st file using the Browse button This file will be copied in the Data folder of the inspection project directory and renamed List st Its name and location will be displayed in the text box underneath the List format drop down list Repeat steps 4 to 8 until all your inspections for this inspection project are configured Once you have set the inspections information about the folder and file structure appears in the Inspection Information subsection The New inspection line indicates the directory where the new inspection files will be saved and the lines underneath the specific location of each file within the inspection directory If this is to your liking click Create The folder and file structure is created The highlighted inspection is automatically loaded in Magnifi and you are ready to start inspections Creating Inspection Projects 216 Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups Performing Acquisitions 218 Setting up the Ectane When you are ready to perform acquisitions the first step is to prepare the Ectane test instrument as explained in Chapter 2 of the Ectane instruction manual Once the Ectane is properly positioned and physical connections are established between the instrument and the workstation you need to establish the software connection Establishing Communication with Ectane Instruments When using an Ectane instrument Eddyfi recommends that your netwo
300. ugged network cable Network card settings Internal defect on the Ectane Defective or unplugged power pack No batteries in the Ectane Internal defect on the Ectane Probe did not have a good contact with the sample during balance The signal generated by the probe is too high The probe is damaged The operating frequency is outside the probe limits Change network cable and make sure that the two network LEDs connections and 100 Mbits light up please refer to your Ectane documentation for LED location Make sure that settings are configured to DHCP and 100 Mbits Please refer to computer manufacturer documentation Call Eddyfi Make sure that green LED on the power pack and the Ectane near the charge connector lights up Put batteries in the Ectane Call Eddyfi Redo the balancing operation ensuring that the probe is in contact during the entire process Reduce the injection voltage and or gain see Configuring Probe Topologies on page 88 Try another probe if available Make sure that you are using the probe in the appropriate frequency range 290 Upgrading the Ectane Firmware Figure 6 1 The first time that you establish communication between the Ectane and Magnifi by clicking on Connect to an instrument from the toolbar or selecting it from the Operation menu you are informed of the communication status Green check mark communication is correct The Ectane is run
301. ument sording ters iannels System Calibration Cag Large Acquisition Window Edit Report 1 Create Note fi Screen Capture t Previous Indication i Next Indication a Ga Automatic Measurements Directories Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi Managing Toolbars Toolbars give you a quicker way to access frequently used functions The preferred position for these toolbars is in the toolbar area but you can move them anywhere you want on screen for the current session Note Toolbar position is not saved in the setup file or when you quit the application Displaying Hiding Toolbars Toolbars can be displayed or hidden individually or all at once To display or hide all toolbars at once select Show All or Hide All from the View menu Figure 1 10 The View menu Magnifi 3 38176 Default setup E Settings Operation Layouts F Error List Setu Show All yl EL Hide An Seh Control Bar Info Bar j General C sean Indication codes Analysis K Acquisition Setup Acquisition Layout Acquisition Notepad Setup Wizard Use large icons Arrange Toolbars r To display or hide a specific toolbar select it from the View menu Displayed toolbars appear with a check mark next to their name Managing Toolbars 10 Changing Icon Size Should you feel that icons are too small for your liking Magnifi offers the possibility to increase the icon size To make icons
302. umns are set to 0 If you click the Normalize icon in the voltage plane measurement bar the Current values are updated with new values If you click the Back to Nominal icon in the voltage plane the Current values are updated with the values displayed in the Nominal column If you click Save nominal the Current values are copied in the Nominal sub columns For more information on these icons see Elements of a Voltage Plane View on page 18 Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 157 Editing the Detect Landmark Processing Unit DA The Detect Landmark processing unit allows you to detect automatically the EN landmarks defined in the landmark table see Managing Landmarks on page 180 Note This processing unit is normally added in a separate group to simplify the processed channel This separate group would include Event Read Either from a raw data or a processed data Median filter high pass or Derivate to center the data on the zero mark Detect Landmark Copy to Channel to have access to a landmark channel To define this processing unit 1 Double click the processing unit icon the Detect landmark dialog box opens Figure 3 101 Configuring the Detect landmark processing unit P Detect landmark Waveform Component Threshold PP distance mm TS p Vertical 10000 000 Location Technique Output Activate output Analysis Acquisit
303. unction far Channel list Left click i Displays a list of channels Click any to select Channel name Left click R Changes to previous channel in list Channel name Right click R Changes to next channel in list 1 Left click N a ii between horizontal vertical amplitude and phase far Data type Left click h Displays a list to choose the data type Scale value Left click R Changes to the previous scale on the list Scale value Right click R Changes to the next scale on the list Scale value Middle click R Opens a list of voltage values Click any to select Scale value Left click vertical drag R Increases Decreases the voltage value on Pi click vertical Q in green the selected area Release the mouse buttton to zoom Signal area Left click R Moves the red cursors to the location of the click For a complete list of mouse and keyboard functions see Mouse and Keyboard Functions on page 325 Displaying Mouse and Keyboard Functions 64 Exiting Magnifi When you are done using Magnifi you can exit the program in either of three ways Select Exit from the File menu Press ALT F4 or Click the close button in the upper right corner of the Magnifi main window Figure 1 77 The File menu i m Magnifi 3 2B2T13 Default setup View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help New gt Load Setup Save Setup ChS FE Save Setup and Default Layout Save Setup As Ctrl Shift S Sav
304. unction is only available after starting acquisition when the automatic recording function is disabled Stop recording Stops recording data to a file This function is only available after starting recording when the automatic recording function is disabled Start stop recording Toggles recording on or off each time you activate the remote control The function is only available after starting acquisition when the automatic recording function is disabled Start next file Starts the next file in the inspection list If automatic recording is enabled it also starts recording data to the file Chapter 3 Preparing Conventional Acquisition Setups 211 Select previous file Selects the file before the one currently selected in the inspection list Select next file Selects the file next to the one currently selected in the inspection list Enter no indication code Adds a No indication code to the report and automatically start the next file For each selected action you must specify when to perform it On press or On release of the remote control Managing Remote Controls 212 Saving Setups An acquisition setup 1s comprised of all the numerical parameters set in the previous pages scan acquisition and C scan parameters sizing curves processed channels calibration points etc After you have finished configuring an acquisition setup you should save it for future use To save a setup 1 On the File menu cli
305. unting direction may be software controlled through the setup dialog box In this case the counter may be configured into UP or DOWN counter Up see explanation about Clock dir Down see explanation about Clock dir In the Unit column select the appropriate measurement unit mm in deg The selected measurement unit has no impact on the application wide measurement unit selected in the General tab of the Preferences window see Setting Measurement Units on page 73 Click in the Resolution field and enter the number of counts per unit of distance In the Filter column select the low pass filter that you want to apply to remove noise or to prevent triggering on glitches In the External sub column of the Preset column select what action must be performed by the encoder at the start of the acquisition None no action is performed at the start of the acquisition PresetActiveLow the acquisition starts when the logical level reaches OV PresetActiveHigh the acquisition starts when the logical level reaches 5V In the Action On Start sub column select whether Preset or not None an external source will be the trigger for the preset In the Value column determine the value at which the preset will start 10 Click Next to move to the next configuration step Configuring Ectane ECT Acquisition Setups There are five available digital inputs Figure 3 14 Encoders and Digital Inputs Instrum
306. ve the gray gate over the pin signal see Figure 4 177 Adjust the level of the gate to about 30 of the maximum signal amplitude and the width slightly larger than the signal see Figure 4 17 Adjusting the target pin gate level uy Magnifi 3 28279 bcusers umgrenierqiecdoouments magnificetupiicis demomagsetup ae File View Settings Operation Layouts Special Help am t a 2 S PSs oR Ow E DeS00s8H08 on jal WT I IE 1 1G 0mm aati A a ase WT r jil rr COR coR JAS GEMS uspesebun ap Sup f Aana dng as T Scan paramet Sing curves Caia m Processed chaira L T N ID Oo d 30 180 0 deg I ma Eig hs Jari ae i ma a k R F COR F COR F COR i I F H oo a Fwp Fw EWG BANE WT WL Pt 21 55 mm AR eckwal Mt Balog oe ea viet j Sem Dunin HI mm leet anion 0 T Mba j oa SO pre j UL PRS 7 input Filer 4 508 MHr i Rectiicstion Tee Gmel Fille 75 MHr Y pm im TSBs I Sce mpl RPS T mmg ak oe E ee eee SF Once the target pin gate is set properly the red cursor in the C scan should start to move and the rotation speed indicator should give a correct value Chapter 4 Performing Acquisitions 235 Adjusting the Front Wall Gate To adjust the front wall gate 1 Click View Envelope to stop cumulating the A scan 2 Insert the probe in the tube New echoes corresponding to the internal diameter of the tube will appear on the right hand side of the A scan 3 Wi
307. you have a valid licence to run the software lf you have a valid hardware key please insert it in a USB port on your workstation and click Retry lf you need to manage Magnifi licences please click Manage lf you want to save your setup and quit the application please click Exit An instrument can serve as a basic hardware key To use your instrument as such click Connect Boat Manage 3 Click Manage The License Information window appears 4 Expand the Hardware section Appendix B 305 Figure B 2 The License Information window Hardware Eddyfi NDT Serial License type Expiration vege ee 5 Click Upgrade current key The Upgrade key window opens Figure B 3 The Upgrade key window fa To Key Serial number 2143329619 6 Click Import License A standard Open window appears 7 Browse to the location of the license file in txt format select the file and click Open The license key appears in the field at the bottom of the Upgrade key window 8 Click OK The license key information appears in the Currently detected fields of the Hardware section Your hardware key is upgraded Upgrading Hardware License Keys 306 Upgrading Software License Keys To upgrade you software license key you need to 1 Release the existing license 2 Request a new license key 3 Upgrade to the current license Releasing Existing License Keys To r
308. your current setup file Customizing Layouts Magnifi allows you to customize layouts to perfectly meet your needs The customizing procedures are explained in the following pages Splitting Panes Horizontally in Two To split a pane horizontally in two k 1 2 Figure 1 37 From the Layout toolbar click the Split horizontally button Position the cursor over the pane that you want to split in two The cursor changes to this The Split Horizontal cursor Click in the pane The pane is split horizontally in two with the same data displayed in both panes Note Panes created with a Split button horizontally or vertically are independent resizable and the view in each can be modified Chapter 1 Introducing Magnifi 35 Splitting Panes Horizontally in More Than Two To split a pane horizontally in more than two Figure 1 38 Figure 1 39 From the Layout toolbar click the Multi split horizontally button The Multi split horizontally window appears The Multi split horizontally window Multi split horizontally How many windows do you want to create 2 16 2 Cene Enter the number of panes that you want to create between 2 and 16 and click OK Position the cursor over the pane that you want to split The cursor changes to this The Split Horizontal cursor Click in the pane The pane is split horizontally in the number of panes that you entered in the Multi split horizontally window Not

Magnifi User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents